TECHNICAL GUIDE f o r F a c i l i t y D e s i g n & C o n s t r u c t i o n

Boulder Valley School District Department of Operational Services

6500 E. Arapahoe Avenue

Boulder, Colorado 80303

www.bvsd.org/capitalimprovements

PREFACE The Boulder Valley School District (BVSD) Technical Guide is intended to provide uniform and consistent minimum quality standards for equipment and materials used in capital construction projects--including new construction, renovation, remodeling and maintenance. This guide is based on considerable design, maintenance, and contracting experience. It is intended to extend the life cycle of materials, systems, and facilities while reducing future maintenance problems. The Technical Guide must be referenced in conjunction with the Consultant Agreement, Construction Agreement, General Conditions of the Contract, and Educational Specifications. The Appendix contains a series of outline specification sections that are intended to be incorporated into the Project Manual. The organization of this Technical Guide is based upon the Uniformat™ classification system:

UniFormat™, a publication of CSI and CSC, is a method of arranging construction information based on functional elements, or parts of a facility characterized by their functions, without regard to the materials and methods used to accomplish them. These elements are often referred to as systems or assemblies.

UniFormat™ breaks a facility into systems and assemblies that perform a predominating function, such as substructure, shell, interiors, and services, without defining the technical solutions to provide these functions. This allows the facility to be priced at the elemental level, allowing design alternatives to be better evaluated, and allows facility performance to be established at the system level as the project design is being refined.

UniFormat’s approach to organizing data is also important to the continued development of building information modeling (BIM) software, as its system organization allows objects to be placed before their properties have been further defined. 1

During the early stages of design, consultant teams intuitively think in terms of building systems—similar to that found in UniFormat. Therefore, it is hoped this Guide facilitates the communication of BVSD standards in a straightforward, brief manner. Prevailing industry standards are acceptable for a topic noted with “No Owner Requirements”.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The following BVSD Operational Services staff contributed to this document. Their help is greatly appreciated.

1 http://www.csinet.org/uniformat

John Albright

Mike Andrews Mark Ashton Mike Batchelor

Ray Batchelor Mike Bechtle

Tom Blahak John Bollinger Ted Burke

Ghita Carroll Mickey Castro

Bob Chamblee Jim Clemmer

John Coleman

Dave Compton Travis Cook Susan Cousins

Mike Cuskelly Shane Eller

Dan Eliasen Kyle Engel Marcin Gebala

Vince Grishman Dave Grosso

Landon Hilliard Gordon Hinshaw

Ricky Holsinger

Joe Hopman Larry Hopman Steve Hopman

Pat Huey Mike Huber

Mike Kelly Scott Key Bill Kilmer

Darron King John King

Arthur Lynch Frank Martinez

Ish Martinez

Jeff Medwetz Aaron Mikulewicz Colin Morrison

Craig Nauman Rusty Norton

Tom Noyes John O'Halloran Don Orr

Terry Palmer Larry Peterson

Paul Poglajen Mark Psheid

Mike Rauer

Dillon Recen Bryan Ross Troy Russell

Steve Schumacher Scott Sheesley

Kerrie Trezise Mike Voss Danny Weber

Chris Wilderman Ray Willis

Becky Young Bob Young

UPDATES TO THIS DOCUMENT See Footnotes in the following sections to identify the precise update. 01/27/2016: B3010 Roofing; C2030 Flooring; D3030 Heating Systems; D3040 Cooling Systems; D4020 Fire

Protection Specialties; D6040 Intercommunications and Program Systems 27 51 23 and Clock systems 27 53 13; D7030 Detection and Alarm Fire Detection and Alarm 28 31 00.

02/24/2016: Appendix—added Fire Detection and Alarm outline specifications 03/11/2016: D3030 Heating Systems; D3040 Cooling Systems; D3050 Facility HVAC Distribution Systems;

Appendix—added IT specifications.

06/01/2016: G1050 Site Earthwork; Appendix—updated IT specifications dated 05/24/16. 08/05/2016: C1020 Interior Windows; Appendix—updated IT specifications dated 08/03/2016 10/05/2016: E1020.1.F Kitchen Equipment 10/14/2016: Appendix—updated IT specifications dated 10/07/2016 11/09/2016: B2030.2.G Aluminum Storefronts; C1070.3.B Display Cases; D20 Plumbing; D30 HVAC; D50

Electrical; Appendix: Finish Hardware 01/27/2017: Appendix—Updated Commissioning; Appendix—updated Fire Detection and Alarm; Appendix—

updated IT specifications dated January 25, 2017 10/02/2017: C1070.3.D.ii Interior Signage; D30 TAB contracting; D6040.1.D.i Rauland/Hubbell; D6040.1.D.i.d

VOIP compatible; E1020.F.iii Milk Dispenser; E1020.F.xxiv Exhaust Hood; E1020.F.xxxiv Salad Bar; E2010.9 Telescoping Stands; G2060 Exterior Signage; Appendix—Hardware 2.01.A.7.ii; Appendix—Hardware 2.02.B; Appendix—IT Cable Standards.

Page 2 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 1 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

INTRODUCTION

PROJECT DESCRIPTION

Project Summary

1. Summary of Work 01 11 00

A. Architect shall prepare project specific summary of work for project manual

2. Work Restrictions 01 14 00 – per current municipality requirements

A. Allowable Work Hours

(i) City of Boulder - 7 am to 9 pm (ii) City Of Broomfield - 7 am to 7 pm M-F, 9 am to 6 pm Sat/Sun/Holidays

(iii) City of Lafayette - 7 am to 10 pm

(iv) City Of Louisville - 7 am to 8 pm M-F, 8 am to 8 pm Sat/Sun/Holidays (v) City of Nederland - 7 am to 7 pm (Boulder County)

(vi) City of Erie - 7 am to 7 pm (Boulder County)

(vii) Boulder County - 7 am to 7 pm

Project Program

1. Site Program

A. Development Criteria shall be site specific

2. Facility Program

A. Pre-K Education Specification - current version

B. K-5 Education Specification - current version

C. K-8 Education Specification - current version D. Middle School Education Specification - current version

E. High School Education Specification - current version

Project Criteria

1. Zoning Requirements 01 41 00

A. Per Municipality Requirements

2. Code Analysis 01 41 13

A. Code Analysis and Code Plan shall be submitted per Colorado Department of Public

Safety, Division of Fire Prevention and Control Building Permit Submittal Document Checklist

B. Documentation of Compliance with the most current adopted International Energy

Conservation Code shall be submitted per Colorado Department of Public Safety, Division of Fire Prevention and Control Building Permit Submittal Document Checklist

C. Soils Report shall be included in the Building Permit Submittal per Colorado Department of Public Safety, Division of Fire Prevention and Control Building Permit Submittal

Document Checklist

3. Building Codes and Standards:

A. As defined on the Colorado Department of Public Safety, Division of Fire Prevention

and Control website.

http://dfs.state.co.us/programs-2/emergency-management/public-school-and-junior-

college-construction-and-inspection/frequently-asked-questions

Page 3 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 2 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

(i) State Agencies that also require approvals

a. State Electrical Board

b. State Plumbing Board c. State Health Department

d. State Boiler Inspection Section

e. Local Fire Department

f. State Conveyance Regulations

4. Design Loads

A. Boulder County Wind and Snow Loads Design Criteria as defined on the Boulder

County website. http://www.bouldercounty.org/doc/landuse/windsnowloadmap.pdf

B. Structural Calculations shall be submitted per Colorado Department of Public Safety,

Division of Fire Prevention and Control Building Permit Submittal Document Checklist

5. Sustainable Design Requirements 01 81 13

A. Energy Efficiency

(i) New Construction

a. New construction shall be designed as Zero Net Energy (ZNE) / Zero Net

Energy-Capable (ZNEC) using the Integrative Design Process. Integrated design means holistic, rather than systems-based design, and collaboration

that extends beyond the design team and traditional perspectives.

b. Energy Use Intensity (EUI) shall be designed to be 25 kBTU/sf/year or less.

(ii) Existing Building Renovation >50,000 sf affected area

a. Projects identified for Deep Energy Retrofits, reduce EUI’s to the following

levels or as identified in the Owner’s Project Requirements.

i. High Schools: 40 kBTU/sf/year

ii. Elementary and Middle Schools: 35 kBTU/sf/year iii. See also http://www.rmi.org/retrofit_depot_download_the_guides

iv. Buildings not identified for Deep Energy Retrofits shall target a 20%

reduction of existing kBTU/sf/year.

(iii) Existing Building Renovation <50,000 sf affected area

a. Comply with the prescriptive path of ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2010

b. These projects should also target a minimum 20% reduction of existing

kBTU/sf/year in the affected area.

B. Energy Audit

(i) Existing Building Renovation >50,000 sf affected area

a. Owner shall conduct an ASHRAE Level 3 Energy Audit to provide the design

team energy improvement recommendations and Basis of Design (BOD)

document.

C. Existing Building Renovation <50,000 sf affected area

a. Owner shall conduct an ASHRAE Level 2 energy audit to provide the design

team energy improvement prescriptions.

D. Building Energy Modeling

(i) Required for New Construction and Deep Energy Retrofit projects

Page 4 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 3 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

(ii) Modeling Tool

a. The modeling tool must be ASHRAE 140 certified

(iii) Inputs

a. Weather input file – Broomfield/Jeffco [Boulder - Surfrad] TMY3

(iv) Utility rates:

a. Electric – Xcel Energy b. Gas – Current Xcel Energy gas rates.

c. Assume 3% utility annual increase.

(v) Setpoints

a. For building setpoints, use 70°F for the occupied heating and 75°F for the occupied cooling. Unoccupied setback in heating mode is 65° and off for

unoccupied cooling. The occupied/unoccupied times will be defined by the

design team.

(vi) Coincident Peak

a. Use the load on the peak day for each month at the following hours to determine the Coincident Peak value. Month Hour Ending

Jan 7:00 PM

Feb 7:00 PM

Mar 7:00 PM

Apr 9:00 PM

May 5:00 PM

Jun 5:00 PM

Jul 5:00 PM

Aug 5:00 PM

Sep 5:00 PM

Oct 7:00 PM

Nov 7:00 PM

Dec 7:00 PM

(vii) Summer Peak Demand Savings

a. When calculating Summer Peak Demand Savings, first find the peak hour in

the reference model and then use the load for the same day and hour in the

proposed models to calculate savings. Summer Peak kW is defined as the

maximum one hour building peak demand within the window of 3‐6 p.m.,

weekdays, June/July/August.

(viii) Winter Peak Demand Savings

a. When calculating Winter Peak Demand Savings, first find the peak hour in the

reference model and then use the load for the same day and hour in the proposed models to calculate savings. Winter Peak kW is defined as the

maximum one hour building peak demand within the window of 5‐7 p.m.,

weekdays, December/January/February

b. Modeling reports are an important tool for the entire project team and should also be specified as to what type of report and when it is expected. They

include information such as:

i. Summary of annual projected utility costs and savings

ii. Performance graphs (e.g., monthly energy use for gas and electric, monthly facility peak kW, etc.) in comparison to the baseline

Page 5 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 4 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

iii. Input parameter information (e.g., internal load specifications, building envelope characteristics, HVAC system definitions, etc.)

iv. Assumptions of building characteristics (e.g., schedules, HVAC setpoints, etc.)

v. Notations of changes from previous modeling versions (e.g., changes

made between schematic design and design development, etc.) vi. Interpretation of results

vii. Software input and output files (electronic)

(ix) Life Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA)

a. Analyze the proposed measures against the calibrated existing building baseline. Analyze the life cycle cost using estimated installation costs,

maintenance costs, and time of equipment replacement (base condition).

b. The LCCA Report should include:

i. Summary of recommended measures including baseline conditions and

proposed changes ii. Any measures considered but not recommended or included in the

analysis

iii. Table of measures included in the bond package and the original budget iv. Table of monthly average energy usage based on historical utility bills

and calculated energy use index (in kBTU/ft2) for the building v. Comparison of monthly historical energy usage versus the baseline

(existing building) model energy use

c. Table summarizing project costs

i. Total Bond allocation

ii. Estimated design consulting fees iii. Estimated utility rebates

iv. Estimated budget remaining for implementation of proposed measures

d. Table summarizing results of LCCA for each proposed measure

i. Energy savings

ii. Energy cost savings iii. Estimate installation cost

iv. Calculated simple payback v. Calculated life cycle cost

vi. Life cycle cost difference in comparison to baseline

vii. Ranking of measures based on life cycle cost viii. The overall building EUI reduction for each measure

ix. Recommendation if the measure should be included in the design package

x. Running installation total of measures recommended to be included

xi. Include envelope study recommendations by grouped packages

e. Projects shall consider Xcel Energy rebates in the design process.

E. Building Envelope Commissioning

(i) Required for New Construction and Deep Energy Retrofit projects

F. Energy System Commissioning

(i) Existing Building Renovation >50,000 sf affected area

a. Full building systems commissioning process required. See Appendix for

specification.

Page 6 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 5 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

(ii) Existing Building Renovation <50,000 sf affected area

a. Commissioning of newly-installed building systems required. See Appendix for

specification.

G. Retro-commissioning

(i) Required as indicated per project scope

H. Photovoltaic System

(i) New roof structures shall be designed and constructed to allow for the installation

of photovoltaic panel installation across the entire surface. Space shall be allocated for the installation of the required electrical equipment.

(ii) Photovoltaic system shall be designed to local wind loads. (iii) Solar panels on the following sfacilities are not owned by BVSD and are under

contract with Solar City. BVSD purchases power from these systems and leases the

roof space to Solar City. In the event that the panels need to be turned off or removed, contractors must work with Owner and Solar City prior to doing so and

make a plan for storing the panels and reinstalling them as soon as possible.

a. Angevine Middle School (Lafayette)

b. Aspen Creek K-8 (Broomfield)

c. Boulder High School (Boulder) d. Broomfield High School (Broomfield)

e. Centaurus High School (Lafayette) f. Coal Creek Elementary School (Louisville)

g. Columbine Elementary School (Boulder) h. Creekside Elementary School (Boulder)

i. Eldorado K-8 (Superior)

j. Foothill Elementary School (Boulder) k. Heatherwood Elementary School (Boulder)

l. Manhattan Middle School (Boulder) m. Monarch High School (Louisville)

n. Sanchez Elementary School (Lafayette)

(iv) Solar panels at the following schools are owned by BVSD. In the event that the panels need to be turned off or removed, Contractors should work with Owner to

uninstall, store and reinstall.

a. Arapahoe Campus High

b. Boulder Community School of Integrated Studies/High Peaks Elementary

c. Casey Middle School d. Crest View Elementary

e. Fireside Elementary f. Flatirons Elementary

g. Jamestown Elementary h. Horizons K8

i. Manhattan Arts and Academics Middle

j. Mesa Elementary k. Monarch K-8

l. Nederland Elementary m. New Vista High School

n. Pioneer Elementary

o. Sanchez Elementary p. Summit Middle

q. Thorne Ecological Institute

Page 7 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 6 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

I. EV Charging Stations

(i) Provide Dual Level 2 charging station. Dual connector with simultaneous AC Level

2 charging, 208 Vac or 240 Vac. Required manufacturers are Eaton or Charge

Point

J. Water Conservation

(i) New and Remodeled Building spaces shall have a minimum of 50% reduction in

water use from baseline for applicable fixtures. (LEED Criteria)

K. Green Building Standards

(i) All New Building and Major Reconstruction projects greater than 50,000 sq. ft.

shall be designed to achieve a minimum of “LEED Gold” status (60 points minimum) as established by the 2009 LEED for Schools New Construction and

Major Retrofits checklist. BVSD will not pursue official certification unless noted

otherwise in the Owner’s Project Requirements.

L. Sustainable Building Materials

(i) 100% of procurement solicitations of goods and services should meet sustainability criteria. All Building projects should use materials that are durable,

repairable, and reusable or recyclable; limit toxins and indoor air pollutants; are

made with high post-consumer recycled content; and are resource and energy

efficient in their manufacturing, use, and disposal.

a. Use recycled and/or rapidly renewable materials whenever possible. Complete Form 4 under Project Forms.

b. All purchased appliances/equipment must be Energy Star certified. c. All wood-based materials and products shall be certified in accordance with

the Forest Stewardship Council’s (FSC) Principles and Criteria.

(ii) Building materials should be selected through use of a Life Cycle Analysis of

environmental impacts which considers:

a. Extraction of materials and fuel used for energy b. Manufacture of building components

c. Transportation of materials and components. Source materials and products

regionally whenever possible (manufactured and/or sourced from within 500 miles of the building site).

d. Assembly and construction e. Operation, including energy consumption, maintenance, repair, and

renovations

f. Demolition, disposal, recycling, and reuse of the building at the end of its functional or useful life.

g. End of life take back programs by manufacturer.

M. Waste Management

(i) Recycle and/or salvage a minimum of 75% of the nonhazardous construction and demolition debris. (LEED Criteria)

(ii) Locations should be identified on site for easy collection of waste, including access

for compost, recycling and trash dumpsters.

N. Education

(i) Project design and construction shall allow for teachable moments. Examples include displays about the construction work in the school and energy efficient or

sustainable features; designing features that teach, such as a truth wall; and

Page 8 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 7 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

including interested student groups and classes in the design and construction

process.

6. Additional Facility Environmental Quality Requirements 01 81 16

A. Design for maximum points in the Indoor Environmental Quality section of the 2009

LEED for Schools New Construction and Major Retrofits checklist.

B. Classroom Light, maximize daylighting opportunities C. Classroom Acoustics: Appropriate acoustical design is extremely important in all types

of educational facilities. The design consultant shall provide acoustical separation or

isolate noise‐generating activities, areas, and equipment. The spaces shall be designed

with appropriate acoustical separations, acoustical absorption and reverberation time

for all intended activities and the various acoustical volumes. As a minimum standard, the design of classrooms and other core learning spaces shall meet the requirements

of ―Prerequisite #3, Minimum Acoustical Performance, LEED for Schools for New

Construction and Major Renovations, 2007. Special attention shall be paid to providing vibration control and sound isolation for mechanical and electrical equipment,

particularly mechanical rooftop units placed above occupied spaces.

D. Classroom Thermal, designed to meet district set-points and maximize thermal comfort

7. Indoor Air Quality Requirements 01 81 19

A. Use Low Volatile Organic Chemical (VOC) flooring material and flooring adhesive,

paints, primers, adhesives and coatings

(i) All products installed in an interior location or location that can off-gas to the

interior of buildings shall comply with the following VOC limits:

a. Plywood Adhesive: Water based contact cement with VOC content not to exceed 10 grams per liter.

b. Total VOC for Upholstered Assembly: Not greater than 0.5 mg/m2/hr.

c. Formaldehyde Emission for Fabric: Not greater than 0.05 mg/m2/hr. d. Formaldehyde Emission for Adhesive: Not greater than 0.05 mg/m2/hr.

e. Phenylcydohexene Emission: Not greater than 0.05 mg/m2/hr. f. Styrene Emission: Not greater than 0.05 mg/m2/hr.

g. 2 Ethyl ‐ 1 Hexanol Emission: Not greater than 3.00 mg/m2/hr.

h. General Adhesives: Water based adhesives with VOC content not to exceed 250 grams per liter.

i. Do not provide adhesives or accessories for wood flooring installation with a

VOC content greater than 150 grams per liter (excluding finishing materials). j. Finishing Material Adhesive: Water based adhesives with VOC content not to

exceed 350 grams per liter.

B. Segregate Occupied Area from Construction Areas with barriers to prevent dust and

fume infiltration.

C. Ventilate Construction Areas directly to the outside not adjacent enclosed areas.

8. Historic Restoration Requirements 01 35 91

A. Design and construction shall follow City of Boulder Historic District Design Guidelines

for review and approval of work on designated buildings.

(i) https://bouldercolorado.gov/historic-preservation/historic-preservation-

applications-design-guidelines

B. City of Boulder Landmark Board Review applies to Mapleton

C. City of Boulder Landmark Board Approval applies to Whittier & University Hill

D. Landmark review and approval is limited to the exterior of the original structure

Page 9 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 8 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

Existing Conditions

1. Assessment 02 20 00

A. Surveys 02 21 00: Site Survey updates are BVSD responsibility B. Existing Conditions Assessment 02 22 00: Facility Condition Assessments are BVSD

responsibility

C. Exiting Material Assessment 02 25 00: Material Condition Assessments are BVSD responsibility

D. Hazardous Material Assessment 02 26 00: Asbestos, Lead, Mercury & PCB

Assessments are BVSD responsibility

2. Subsurface Investigation 02 30 00

A. Geophysical Investigations 02 31 00: Per CRS 22-32-124, all projects must undergo a

State of Colorado Geological Review – BVSD responsibility

B. Geotechnical Investigations 02 32 00: Soil Investigation and Foundation

Recommendation to be completed by BVSD Geotechnical Consultant

Owner’s Work 01 11 16

1. Hazardous Material Abatement to be completed by BVSD Contractor

2. Facility Furniture Fixtures & Equipment Moves by BVSD Contractor

3. Facility Furniture Fixtures & Equipment Procurement & Installation by BVSD Contractor

4. Improvement of BVSD Fiber Optic Wide Area Network by BVSD Contractor

OWNER DEVELOPMENT

Site Acquisition

1. Site Purchase or Lease shall be executed by BVSD

2. Rights-of-Way and Easements

A. Rights-of-Way and Easements Modifications prepared by Architect and submitted on

behalf of BVSD

3. Utilities

A. Improvement of Electrical and Gas Utilities(Xcel) – Application prepared by Architect / Engineer and submitted on behalf of BVSD

B. Improvement of Communication Utilities (Century Link, Comcast) – Application

prepared by Architect and submitted on behalf of BVSD C. Improvement of Fiber Optic Utilities (BVSD) – Design and Build of Fiber Optic

Infrastructure is to be contracted by BVSD D. Improvement of Water, Sanitary Sewer, Storm Sewer per municipality requirements

Permits 00 31 46

A. Attachment A - State of Colorado Permit Plan Review Application - submitted by

Architect / BVSD expense B. Attachment B - Public School Construction and Inspection Fees - BVSD expense

C. Attachment C – Building Permit Submittal Worksheet – submitted by Architect D. Attachment D - Small Project Building Permit - submitted by Architect or BVSD / BVSD

expense

E. Attachment E – Fire Code Plan Review, used for Modifications to Fire Sprinkler / Standpipe, Fire Detection and Alarm and Kitchen Hood Suppression – submitted by

contractor / contractor expense, Not Applicable for City of Boulder F. Attachment F – Notification to DFPC of Hired 3rd Party Inspector – submitted by BVSD

G. Attachment G – Pre-Construction Meeting Agenda – submitted by State Inspector

Page 10 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 9 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

2. Right of Way Permits

A. As required by the specific Municipality

B. Prepared and submitted by the General Contactor at the contractors expense

contractor

3. Storm Water Management Permits

A. As required by State of Colorado in accordance with Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment; Water Quality Control Division; Storm water Program

https://www.colorado.gov/pacific/sites/default/files/STORMWATER%20MANAGEMENT%20PLAN%20PREPARATION%20GUIDANCE.pdf

B. Prepared and submitted by the General Contractor at the contractors expense

4. Ditch Right of Way / Easement

A. Prepared by Architect / Engineer, submitted by the contractor at BVSD Expense

5. Regulatory Required Permits 01 41 00

A. Kitchen Modifications Permit Requirements

(i) Boulder County Health Plan Review Packet, prepared and submitted by Architect –

BVSD expense

http://www.bouldercounty.org/doc/publichealth/retailph.pdf

B. Early Childhood Education Licensing Requirements

(i) Colorado Department of Human Services, Division of Child Care http://www.coloradoofficeofearlychildhood.com/#!rules-and-regulations/c86y

(ii) Boulder County Public Health Plan Review Application prepared and submitted by

Architect – BVSD expense

http://www.bouldercounty.org/doc/publichealth/childcareplanreviewapp.pdf

C. Broomfield County Health

(i) TBD

D. Fire Department Plan Review

(i) City of Boulder - Authorized Reviewer: City of Boulder Fire

(ii) City Of Broomfield - Authorized Reviewer: North Metro Fire (iii) City of Lafayette - Authorized Reviewer: Colorado Division of Fire Safety

(iv) City Of Louisville - Authorized Reviewer: Louisville Fire Protection District (v) City of Nederland - Authorized Reviewer: Colorado Division of Fire Safety

(vi) City of Erie - Authorized Reviewer: Colorado Division of Fire Safety

(vii) Boulder County - Authorized Reviewer: Colorado Division of Fire Safety

E. Elevator Installation or Alteration Permit

(i) Application submitted and paid for by elevator contractor

(ii) Third Party Elevator inspection required – elevator contractor expense

Professional Services

1. Design Professionals

A. Architects

(i) Contracted by BVSD, must have LEED AP on staff

B. Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical Engineers

Page 11 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 10 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

(i) Contracted by Architect

C. Landscape Architects

(i) As requested by BVSD Project Manager

(ii) Contracted by Architect

D. Interior Designers

(i) As requested by BVSD Project Manager

(ii) Contracted by Architect

2. Other Consultants

A. Surveyors

(i) Contracted by BVSD

B. Geotechnical Engineers

(i) Contracted by BVSD

C. Commissioning Agents

(i) Contracted by BVSD

D. Sustainable Design Consultants

(i) As needed to comply with AA1030.5 in this document

3. Testing Laboratories 01 45 29 – no special requirements

4. Special Inspectors 01 45 23 as required by Colorado Department of Public Safety, Division

of Fire Prevention and Control permit requirements

A. Special Inspections requirements are project specific and identified on the State

Building Permit

(i) Contracted by BVSD,

B. Third Party Inspections requirements are project specific and identified on the State

Building Permit

(i) Inspector must be state certified

(ii) Contracted by BVSD

PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS

Project Delivery

1. Project Delivery Methods shall be specified by BVSD Project Manager

A. Design-Bid-Build:

(i) Recommended for projects less than $5M

B. Construction Manager / General Contractor (CM/GC)

(i) Recommended for projects greater than $5M

C. Design/Negotiate/Build, Construction Manager as Advisor, Design/Build, Owner/Build,

Integrated Project Delivery

(i) Not Recommended

2. Number of Construction Contracts

A. Single Contract - Required

B. Multiple Contracts – Not Allowed

Page 12 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 11 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 20 May 15 Department of Operational Services

3. Methods of Payment

A. Stipulated Sum 00 52 13

(i) Use for Design-Bid-Build Projects

B. Unit Price 00 52 43

(i) only with BVSD Project Manager approval

C. Cost Plus a Fee 00 52 33

(i) Not Allowed

D. Cost Plus a Fee with a Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP)

(i) Use for CM/GC Projects

Solicitation 00 10 00

1. No owner requirements

Instructions for Procurement 00 20 00

1. Follow BVSD Purchasing Requirements. Contact Project Manager

Available Project Information 00 31 00

1. The following will be provided by owner

A. Preliminary Schedules 00 31 13

B. Project Budget Information 00 31 16

C. Existing Condition Information 00 31 19 D. Survey Information 00 31 21

E. Environmental Assessment Information 00 31 24 F. Existing Material Information 00 31 25

G. Existing Hazardous Material Information 00 31 26 H. Geophysical Data 00 31 31

I. Geotechnical Data 00 31 32

J. Permit Application 00 31 43: By Architect, fee by BVSD

Procurement Forms

1. Per BVSD Requirements; contact Project Manager

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Contracting Forms and Supplements 00 50 00

1. No owner requirements

Project Forms 00 60 00

1. Bond Forms 00 61 00: Use BVSD forms. See Project Manager.

Conditions of the Contract 00 70 00

1. Use BVSD approved forms. See Project Manager

Revisions, Clarifications, and Modifications 00 90 00

1. Use BVSD approved forms. See Project Manager.

Page 13 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 1 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13-Mar-15 Department of Operational Services

ELEMENT A: SUBSTRUCTURE

FOUNDATIONS

Standard Foundations

1. Standard Foundation Supplementary Components

A. Void Forms 03 11 00

(i) Void form shall be stored and kept dry prior to concrete placement. Any form

crushed or damaged shall be replaced prior to concrete placement.

B. Inspection of formwork and reinforcing by Architect is required before concrete placement.

C. The use of earth as a form will not be allowed.

D. Lap forming will not be allowed. E. Use of calcium chloride additive is prohibited.

F. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen or saturated ground. G. Testing agency shall be designated, secured, and services paid for by the Owner.

Testing will be done per specified procedures. Architect will consult with Owner if

additional testing is needed. Architect will consult with Owner’s geotechnical consultant regarding the number of tests, number of cylinders, etc. Contractor will schedule

testing with Owner’s testing agency.

(i) Averaging of separate tests to determine strength is not permitted. Contractor will

contact testing agency to schedule specified testing.

(ii) Contractor shall work with the Owner to schedule Owner’s inspections and testing. (iii) Coordinate form release oils or other products with materials to be applied over

concrete

Special Foundations 31 60 00

A. Helical piers prohibited unless approved by BVSD

B. Micropiling prohibited unless approved by BVSD.

SUBGRADE ENCLOSURES

Walls for Subgrade Enclosures

1. Subgrade Enclosure Wall Construction

A. Exposed rough texture finish concrete prohibited for interior and exposed exterior

finish.

SLABS-ON-GRADE

Standard Slabs-on-Grad

1. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00

A. Specify restrictions for hot and cold weather placement B. Contractor is responsible for protection of concrete in work areas where concrete will

be exposed. C. No concrete shall be placed on frozen ground.

D. Control joints in concrete slabs on grade shall be shown on the drawings or maximum

spacing per ACI 301. Reinforcing shall extend through joints unless noted otherwise. Sawed joints shall be ¼ of the slab thickness. Saw cutting shall be started as soon as

the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by the saw, and shall be completed before shrinkage stresses have developed sufficiently to

induce cracking.

Page 14 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 2 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13-Mar-15 Department of Operational Services

2. E. Use of pigmented and stained concrete shall be approved by BVSD prior to placement of

finished product.

(i) Representative sample of stained concrete shall be approved by BVSD prior to commencement and will be retained for comparison.

(ii) Specify concrete finishes for all interior concrete whether covered with finish

flooring or left exposed. Specify a finished clear sealer for all interior slabs that are to remain exposed in the finished work

(iii) F. Consideration should be given to addition of fiber reinforcement. Interior floor slabs should receive a trowel finish.

(iv) G. Acid washing is prohibited unless fully extracted. All surrounding surfaces are to

receive adequate protection from acid wash procedures.

Structural Slabs-on-Grade: No Owner Requirements

Slab Trenches: No Owner Requirements Pits and Bases: No Owner Requirements

Slab-On-Grade: Supplementary Components

1. 1. Vapor Retarder 07 26 00

A. Where floor coverings are to be applied to a finished slab on grade provide a moisture

barrier below the slab to prevent the migration of moisture up through the slab

WATER AND GAS MITIGATION

Building Subdrainage

1. Foundation Drainage 33 46 13

A. Perimeter drain shall be provided where indicated by Geotechnical report.

Off-Gassing Mitigation 31 21 00

1. Verify requirements for radon mitigation with Owners Hazardous Materials department.

SUBSTRUCTURE RELATED ACTIVITIES

Substructure Excavation 31 23 16

1. 1. Backfill and Compaction 31 23 23

A. Strictly comply with recommendations and reports of Geotechnical Engineer.

B. The Owner will employ a soils engineer to assist in obtaining required compaction

standards. Consult the soils investigation report for suggested compaction standards for this project.

C. Soil Stabilization: Lime stabilization not allowed unless approved in writing by BVSD. Procedures are to be reviewed and accepted by owner and Geotechnical Engineer prior

to implementation.

Construction Dewatering 31 23 19: No Owner Requirements Excavation Support 31 50 00: No Owner Requirements

Soil Treatment 31 31 00

1. 1. Rodent Control 31 31 13

A. The District is responsible for removal of prairie dogs before commencement of work.

Page 15 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 11/09/2016 Department of Operational Services

ELEMENT B: SHELL

SUPERSTRUCTURE

Floor Construction

1. Levelness 01 83 13

A. Where concrete is exposed, slab shall be flat and smooth in accordance with ACI-117

specifications. Precautions should be taken at joints to avoid curling.

2. Floor Decks, Slabs, and Toppings

A. Metal Decking 05 30 00

(i) Decking exposed to high humidity areas shall have galvanized coating, hot dipped application in accordance with ASTM A653.

(ii) Steel deck shall be stored off the ground with one end elevated to provide

drainage, and shall be protected from the elements with a waterproof covering, ventilated to avoid condensation.

(iii) If metal deck will be used as a finished ceiling it shall be protected from moisture and must never be subjected to corrosive substances.. All decks must be protected

from erection operations that could distort the panels configuration.

B. Acoustical Metal Decking 05 34 00

(i) Decks utilizing fiberglass insulation batts must be protected from moisture, rain,

snow, dirt, or mud. Field installed batts are to be installed in the flutes just before roof system installation. Shop installed batts are to be protected until roof

installation.

Roof Construction

1. Roof Structural Frame

A. Design should consider sloping of steel support system in lieu of adding tapered

insulation. Minimum ¼” per foot slope is preferred.

2. Canopy Construction

A. Decorative open canopies with no protective cover are Prohibited. Consideration shall

be given to prevention of roosting birds and ice formation.

B. Exposed undersurface of any exterior overhanging section of a roof eave shall be of

water resistant materials. Gypsum wallboard Prohibited.

Stairs

1. Stair Construction

A. Precast Concrete Stair Treads 03 48 19

(i) Precast stair tread design shall allow for future replacement

B. Metal Stairs 05 51 00

(i) Exterior stairs and ladders shall have weather resistant coatings approved by BVSD

C. Metal Stair Treads and Nosing 05 55 00

(i) Interior exposed concrete stairs shall have integral metal nosing with tread.

2. Stair Soffits

A. Plaster and Gypsum Board 09 20 00

Page 16 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 11/09/2016 Department of Operational Services

(i) Suspended acoustical soffits Prohibited.

3. Stair Railings

A. Wire Rope Railings 05 15 00 Prohibited B. Metal Railings 05 52 00 Preferred

C. Decorative Metal Railings 05 73 00 Preferred

D. Wood Railings 06 43 16 Prohibited E. Plastic Railings 06 63 00 Prohibited

F. Composite Railings 06 81 00 Prohibited

4. Fire Escapes 05 51 23 Prohibited

A. Metal Catwalks 05 51 36.13

(i) Catwalks and grating exposed to high humidity areas shall have galvanized

coating, hot dipped application in accordance with ASTM A653.

EXTERIOR VERTICAL ENCLOSURE

Exterior Walls

1. Exterior Wall Veneer

A. Unit Masonry:

(i) Brick is the preferred exterior material. Retrofit: New masonry coursing preferred

to match adjacent existing. (ii) Single wythe unit masonry walls Prohibited. CMU masonry walls preferred as back-

up for brick veneer walls.

(iii) CMU: Plain Faced, Ground Face, and acoustic with integral color are acceptable. Split face allowed only by written permission by Owner.

(iv) If unit masonry is used on interior of building, all exposed corners are to be bull nosed. Avoid bullnose at door jambs where resilient base is to be applied. Frames

or other trim shall extend ½” beyond face of masonry so base can abut.

(v) Sound absorbing acoustic units: NRC 0.65 minimum. (vi) Define procedures and standards of workmanship and cold weather guidelines in

pre-construction meetings. (vii) Define procedures for removing effloresce without the use of muriatic acid or high

pressure spray. (viii) Grout all hollow metal frames at masonry and concrete walls.

(ix) Coordinate tolerances with other trades before construction.

(x) Masonry detailing shall be in accordance with Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute standards.

(xi) Glass Unit Masonry: Discouraged. (xii) Adobe Unit Masonry: Prohibited.

(xiii) Vitreous type glazed tile: Prohibited

B. Stone Masonry 04 43 13

(i) Native, local stone.

(ii) Retrofit: Match existing. Samples are to be provided for approval by Owner. (iii) Source documentation required.

(iv) Provide stone quarried and fabricated within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

(v) Where possible, use salvaged stone to the greatest extent possible

C. Water Repellants 07 19 00

(i) Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 140. (ii) Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96.

Page 17 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 11/09/2016 Department of Operational Services

(iii) Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: ASTM E 514. (iv) Apply anti-graffiti material to exterior walls to a minimum height of 10’-0” above

bottom course. Coordinate requirements with Owner. (v) Stain only on exterior wood is Prohibited. Provide a minimum of (2) coats of finish

over stain base coats.

D. Exterior insulation and finishing system (EIFS) : Prohibited

E. Siding 07 46 00

(i) If metal siding is used, metal gauge shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent denting from normal school activities. Minimum 4’-0” above finished grade.

(ii) Panels to have integral backing to prevent oil-canning. Minimal maintenance required.

(iii) Care should be taken during installation to prevent damage to face. Damaged

panels will be replaced at the discretion of the district.

F. Cement Plastering: Discouraged

G. Cement Stucco: Preferred

H. Painting and Coating: minimize use of materials that require coatings

2. Parapets

A. Height of parapet walls shall be sufficient to allow for proper insulation and flashing to

be installed.

3. Equipment Screens

A. Louvered Equipment Enclosures 08 92 00

(i) Screens shall allow for disassembly to service or replace mechanical units and

allow adequate space for routine maintenance and filter replacement.

4. Exterior Wall Supplementary Components

A. Vapor Retarder 07 26 00

(i) Vapor barriers shall consist of fully adhered building wrap or spray applied foam

applied to seal all wall openings

B. Insulation 07 20 00

(i) Continuous insulation is required. No gaps or voids permitted.

C. Expansion Joints 07 95 00

(i) Maximum space for caulk joints shall be ¾”. Wider spaces shall be permanently

sealed.

(ii) Architect shall detail location of control and expansion joints on drawings

5. Exterior Wall Opening Supplementary Components

A. Lintels

(i) Exposed lintels shall be coated to prevent corrosion

B. Flashing 07 60 00

(i) Sharp edges and corners on flashing are Prohibited.

(ii) Consideration should be given to height of flashing in relation to adjacent

walkways to avoid injury to pedestrian traffic.

C. Sills

(i) Precast sills preferred

Page 18 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 11/09/2016 Department of Operational Services

Exterior Windows

1. Performance Class and Grade 01 83 16

A. Maximum area of individual pane of glazing shall not be greater than 20 square feet. This will facilitate maintenance and replacement.

B. Consider laminated glass in lieu of tempered glass at entries

C. Glazing shall not be lower than 24” above finished floor or ground to avoid breakage. D. In all cases windows shall have integral thermal break.

E. Wire glass prohibited. F. Wood Windows: Use only where required to meet historic preservation requirements.

G. Aluminum Windows: Preferred. H. Plastic Windows: Not Allowed

I. Roof Windows: Prohibited

J. Steel Windows : Not Allowed K. Stainless Steel Windows: Not Allowed

L. Maximum window "U" factor shall be between .25 and .55

2. Wind Load Capacity 01 83 16

A. Refer to Boulder County Colorado Front Range Gust Map

3. Thermal Resistance 01 83 16

A. Heat mitigation should be considered in window design and selection.

4. Exterior Operating Windows 08 50 00:

A. Operable sash with insect screen required for most exterior applications.

B. Operating mechanism and screens shall not interfere with window blind operation.

(i) Window Screens 08 51 66. Aluminum preferred

(ii) Storm Windows 08 51 69: Not Allowed

a. Stops to be installed to limit operation, final adjustment to be determined by owner.

b. Consideration to be given to interference with pedestrian traffic on adjoining

walkways.

Exterior Doors and Grilles

1. Exterior Doors Performance Requirements 01 83 16

A. Thermal Resistance 01 83 16

(i) All opaque doors, including swinging doors and overhead doors shall have the following thermal performance criteria.

(ii) U-factor for metal overhead doors shall be between .25 and .55 (Btu/hr sq ft °F)

(iii) U-factor for metal swinging doors, including fire-rated doors, insulated access hatches, and insulated smoke vents shall not be greater than 0.50 (Btu/hr sq ft

°F). (iv) Swinging doors shall have an insulated core.

(v) Where thermally broken welded frame product is specified, welds shall not cause

thermal transfers between exterior and interior surfaces.

2. Exterior Entrance Doors 08 42 00

A. Sliding Glass Doors 08 32 00: Not Allowed B. All-Glass Entrances 08 42 26: Not Allowed

C. Automatic Entrances 08 42 29: Pushbutton operation preferred. D. Revolving Door Entrances 08 42 33: Not Allowed

Page 19 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 11/09/2016 Department of Operational Services

E. Balanced Door Entrances 08 42 36: Not Allowed F. Sliding Storefronts 08 43 29: Prohibited

G. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Wide stile preferred.

(i) Non-conducting thermal breaks should separate aluminum members exposed to

the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

(ii) Warranty to be manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty

period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.

(iii) Manufacturers: Kawneer or EFCO, or equal with District approval1

H. Stainless Steel Entrances and Storefronts: Not Allowed I. Steel Entrances and Storefronts: No Special Requirements

J. Exterior Oversize Doors : Prohibited

K. Exterior Coiling Doors 08 33 00 Prohibited L. Exterior Panel Doors 08 36 00 Prohibited

M. Exterior Sectional Doors 08 36 13 N. Exterior Single-Panel Doors 08 36 16 Prohibited

O. Exterior Multi-Leaf Vertical Lift Doors 08 36 19 Prohibited

P. Exterior Telescoping Vertical Lift Doors 08 36 23 Prohibited

3. Exterior Door Supplementary Components

A. Specialty Door Frames 08 30 00: Door frame shall have continuous thermal break between the interior and exterior surfaces.

B. Exterior and wet area frames and frame components shall be 14-guage, hot dipped galvanized steel having an A 60 zinc coating conforming to ASTM specification A 525.

C. Exterior and wet area doors shall be 14-guage, A 60 Galvanized. Tops of doors shall

be made flush and sealed with the use of 16-guage channel in addition to the 14-guage inverted steel reinforcement channels. Plastic filler channels or flush

reinforcement channels are prohibited.

B2080 Exterior Wall Appurtenances

1. Exterior Fixed Grilles and Screens 10 82 13

A. Decorative Metal 05 70 00 Preferred

(i) Factory anodized finish with a minimum 0.8 mil thickness.

2. Bird Control Devices 10 81 13

A. Design shall not provide for convenient roosting areas for birds.

EXTERIOR HORIZONTAL ENCLOSURES

Roofing

1. Roofing Performance Requirements 01 83 19

A. Preferred system: Four-ply asphalt built up roof system that is graveled.2

B. Fully adhered EPDM rubber systems permitted with BVSD approval.3

C. Must comply with BVSD Roofing consultant; coordinate with BVSD Project Manager

2. Roofing Shingles and Shakes 07 31 00

A. Prohibited except to match existing conditions

1 Changed 11/09/2016 2 Added 01/27/2016 3 Added 01/27/2016

Page 20 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 11/09/2016 Department of Operational Services

3. Roof Tiles 07 32 00

A. Prohibited except to match existing conditions

4. Roofing Pavers 07 76 00

A. Provide non-deteriorating walkways walk pads from roof access point to roof mounted

mechanical units. Precast concrete pavers discouraged.

5. Vegetated Low-Slope Roofing 07 55 63

A. Prohibited without acceptance by BVSD.

B. Must include adequate fall protection railing integral with building design

Roof Appurtenances

1. Roof Accessories 07 72 00

A. Roof Ladders 05 51 33

(i) Ladder shall have safety extensions at roof level

B. Snow Guards 07 72 53

(i) Plastic adhesive applied snow guards are prohibited.

(ii) Ridge applied Standing seam mechanically fastened snow guards fences are

preferred.

2. Rainwater Management

A. Gutters 07 71 23

(i) Plastic or composite gutters are Prohibited

(ii) Metal gutters shall be corrosion resistant and of sufficient gauge and have proper support for ice and snow loads. Gutters shall be in as long a continuous length as

possible.

B. Downspouts 07 71 23

(i) Plastic or composite downspouts are Prohibited

(ii) Metal downspouts shall be corrosion resistant and of sufficient gauge and have proper support for ice and snow loads.

(iii) Downspouts shall have open design so obstructions can be easily removed. (iv) Care should be taken in design to avoid placement of scuppers at or above

walkway areas or drain into areas where water can freeze.

C. Scuppers and Overflow Roof Drains 07 71 33

(i) Care should be taken in design to avoid placement of scuppers at or above

walkway areas or drain into areas where water can freeze.

D. Precast Concrete Splash Blocks 03 48 16

(i) Provide non-deteriorating splashblocks under all downspouts and size to prevent

erosion.

B3060 Horizontal Openings

1. Framed Skylights--Clerestories are preferred over skylight roof penetrations.

A. Metal-Framed Skylights 08 63 00

(i) Preferred where approved by owner. (ii) Tubular skylights shall be minimum 18” diameter and shall include electrically

actuated dimmers in classrooms.

Page 21 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 11/09/2016 Department of Operational Services

(iii) Electrically actuated dimmers not required in corridors.

B. Plastic-Framed Skylights 08 64 00 Prohibited

2. Skylight Protection and Screens 08 67 00

A. Skylights over a 24” square opening shall have integral fall protection railing

surrounding them.

3. Roof Hatches 07 72 33

(i) Roof hatches shall include safety posts or safety railings

Overhead Exterior Enclosures

1. Exterior Ceilings

A. Gypsum Board 09 20 00 Prohibited

2. Exterior Soffits

A. Gypsum Board 09 20 00 Prohibited

B. Painting and Coating 09 90 00

(i) Soffits shall have factory finish applied if they are metal or integral color cement

board.

3. Exterior Bulkheads

A. Gypsum Board 09 20 00 Prohibited

B. Painting and Coating 09 90 00

(i) Bulkheads shall have factory finish applied if they are metal or integral color

cement board

Page 22 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 1 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

ELEMENT C: INTERIORS

C10 INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION

Interior Partitions

Interior Partitions Performance Requirements

A. Sound Transmission 01 84 13 -Provide design of interior walls to provide the following

STC rating minimums:

(i) 50 at classrooms, special education spaces, and health rooms.

(ii) 45 at corridor, office and conference rooms. (iii) 60 at music rooms, mechanical equipment rooms, cafeteria, kitchens, and

auditoriums.

(iv) Other locations should be designed for appropriate STCs and NRCs by use.

Interior Fixed Partitions – Gymnasiums, locker rooms, corridors, etc., walls to door height

minimum should be materials resistant to impact and hard use. Finish should be non-abrasive, resistant to marking, scaring and of a material that can be easily cleaned or re-

finished. Masonry preferred, other materials allowed with owner approval.

A. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00

(i) Provide for bullnose or chamfered outside corners.

B. Precast Concrete 03 40 00

(i) Provide for bullnose or chamfered outside corners.

(ii) Broom finish Prohibited on exposed surfaces.

C. Unit Masonry 04 20 00

(i) Provide bullnose outside corners at all concrete block walls.

(ii) Split face block Prohibited without owner approval inside buildings.

D. Structural Metal Stud Framing 05 41 00

(i) Provide wall studs at 16” o.c. maximum spacing in areas of impact where possible. Consider 24” oc where spacing conflicts with STC rating.

(ii) Soffits 16” o.c. exterior or 24” o.c. interior.

(iii) 25 gauge minimum for interior applications. (iv) 20 gauge double steel studs at door jambs

(v) 16 gauge minimum for exterior studs and 2-leaf door jambs

(vi) Detail “slip joints” at top of partition, not base.

E. Wood Framing 06 11 00

(i) Wood stud walls - Prohibited without owner permission. (ii) Provide fire treated wood blocking as required for backing for attachment through

gypsum board where applicable.

Plaster and Gypsum Board 09 20 00

A. D. APPLICATIONS/RESTRICTIONS

(i) Provide gypsum board with paper faces containing 100% post-consumer recycled

paper and gypsum cores containing 10% recycled gypsum content.

(ii) Use 5/8” fire rated gypsum board in all “dry” (no plumbing) locations. (iii) Use cement board in lieu of gypsum board at all wet area or plumbing walls and

behind all ceramic tile installations on framed walls.

Page 23 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 2 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(iv) Gypsum board discouraged below 6’-0” in common/public areas of middle and high schools. Protect below 6’-0” against heavy traffic and abuse.

(v) Provide impact resistant gypsum board to 6’-0” in corridors and other appropriate locations.

(vi) Limit gypsum plaster to patching of existing conditions. Prohibited without owner

approval.

B. E. EXECUTION SUMMARY

C. “L” Metal beads at all termination edges exposed to view.

D. Finish: Smooth “level 4” finish preferred. Match existing at retrofit work.

Wire Mesh Partitions 10 22 13: No owner requirements

Interior Glazed Partitions

A. Interior Storefronts 08 43 00 – Comply with all fire and safety requirements.

(i) Hollow metal or Aluminum systems preferred. Coordinate requirements for privacy

blinds, roller shades, or obscure glass with owner.

Interior Demountable Partitions 10 22 19: Prohibited without owner approval

Interior Operable Partitions

A. Interior Operable Partitions Performance Requirements:

(i) Sound Transmission 01 84 13 STC ratings should approximate adjacent fixed partition ratings.

(ii) Provide independent structural support.

B. Accordion Folding Partitions 10 22 33: Prohibited.

C. Coiling Partitions 10 22 36: Prohibited. D. Folding Panel Partitions 10 22 39: Prohibited.

E. Sliding Partitions 10 22 43: Prohibited.

Interior Windows 08 50 00

1. Interior Windows Performance Requirements 01 84 13

A. Interior Fixed Windows 08 50 00 - Hollow metal or aluminum preferred. B. Interior Observation Windows- with owner approval

C. Interior Pass Windows 08 56 19 - Provide for sturdy, lockable design. Locks built into

frame or track preferred to ratcheting, glass “slide-on” type. D. Window Film 08 87 13 - At main secure entry vestibules, provide 3M Ultra S800 Film or

equal at all window and door glazing. Review full extent of Window Film with BVSD

Security.1

Interior Doors 08 10 00

1. Interior Swinging Doors 08 10 00

A. Hardware: See Appendix

B. Wood Doors:

(i) All interior wood doors shall be 1-3/4” pre-finished solid core, AWI Custom grade

or WDMA Premium grade, 5 ply, with FSC Certified fully bonded MDF, SCL, agri-fiber, or staved wood cores.

(ii) Performance standard: Meet WDMA I.S.1-A, Extra Heavy Duty.

(iii) Standard door height 7’-0” unless approved by owner. Verify existing door heights.

1 Added 08/05/2016

Page 24 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 3 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(iv) Use FSC-certified sustainably harvested woods and veneers. Provide Grade ‘A’ hardwood face veneers. Wood species as approved by owner, match existing in

remodels where applicable. Match the face veneer species at exposed vertical door stiles.

(v) Only low odor/low-VOC emitting core boards, adhesives, composite wood

products, and MDF shall be used. (vi) Mineral core wood doors Prohibited without owner approval. Use hollow metal

doors where above described solid core wood doors do not meet fire code rating. (vii) Factory finish of wood doors preferred. Field finish allowed with owner approval.

Use low VOC stains and sealers. (viii) Provide wood frames for light openings, same species as door preferred. Utilize

wood frames in 20-minute fire doors with code approved concealed metal glazing

clips. Pre-finished metal light frames allowed with owner approval on a project by project basis.

(ix) A lifetime of the building guarantee is required for all solid core wood doors.

Steel Doors and Frames:

A. Interior doors, frames, and frame components shall be manufactured from cold-rolled

steel conforming to ASTM specification A 366. Standard door height 7’-0” unless approved by owner. Verify existing door heights.

B. Interior frames shall be 16-guage cold rolled. All frames to be back welded at the faces and ground smooth.

C. All frames to receive a high frequency hinge reinforcement at top hinge only, or full width hinge reinforcements.

D. Interior doors shall be 16-guage cold-rolled, with visible edge seams.

E. Doors with glass cutouts shall be flush glazed. Glazing kits to be flush with door panels.

Interior Coiling Doors 08 33 00

A. Stainless steel preferred at kitchen and serving locations. Review application and any

required fire alarm interface with owner.

Interior Panel Doors 08 36 00

A. Interior Sectional Doors 08 36 13- Overhead doors allowed with owner approval.

Special consideration of hardware and operation with safety in mind.

Interior Special Function Doors 08 30 00

A. Interior Sound Control Doors 08 34 73

(i) Consider installation at Music, Band and Practice Rooms to approximate STC of

adjacent walls.

Interior Access Doors and Panels 08 31 00

A. Provide at valves, controls, and all locations where adequately sized access for maintenance of equipment is required. Consider keying locks to building system in

unsupervised locations.

Interior Grilles and Gates

1. Interior Grilles

A. Interior Coiling Grilles 08 33 00 – Stainless steel preferred at kitchen locations. Review

application and use with owner.

Interior Gates

A. Interior Security Gates 08 34 56 - Prohibited without owner approval

Page 25 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 4 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(i) Provide swinging doors in lieu of gates wherever possible. Gate placement shall avoid creating dead end corridors when closed. Key all gates and recessed gate

cabinets alike, with mortise cylinders masterkeyed to building system.

Raised Floor Construction

1. Platform/Stage Floors

A. Thrust stage and orchestra pit covers should be single manufacturer’s engineered and

warranted system design.

Suspended Ceiling Construction

Suspended Ceiling Construction Performance Requirements

A. Fire Rating 01 84 13

(i) Class A; 1-hour rated materials. Limit rated ceiling construction assemblies to

those required by code.

B. Sound Transmission 01 84 13

(i) STC Rating: 35 to 39 required in assignable classroom and office spaces.

(ii) Consider higher NRC and STC rated ceilings in critical sound controlled areas.

C. Recycled Content:

(i) Provide acoustical ceiling tile with a range of 79%-85% post-consumer recycled

content. (ii) Provide suspension system with minimum of 25% recycled content.

(iii) Suspended ceiling products shall be 100% recyclable.

D. Sound Attenuation 01 84 13 CAC 35 (minimum)

E. Sound Absorption 01 84 13 70 NRC (minimum in teaching spaces)

F. Light Reflectance 01 84 13 – 0.75 (minimum)

Acoustical Suspended Ceilings 09 51 00 - All classrooms should have acoustic ceilings or

equivalent acoustic control.

(i) Preferred: Armstrong World Industries, or USG compressed mineral fiber non-

directional deep fissure in manufacturers’ standard, factory applied white color. (ii) 5/8” minimum, square edge, 24”x48” or 24”x24” tiles.

(iii) Minimum height AFF: 8’-0”

(iv) Impact resistant coating in corridors, high use, non-assignable areas. (v) Mylar, vinyl, or impervious finish required at kitchens and food service areas.

(vi) Provide extra panels: 1% of installed panel types. Quantity shall be rounded up to

the nearest full carton.

B. Acoustic Insulation 09 81 00

(i) Avoid placing loose laid batts on accessible ceiling panels for sound control.

Suspended Plaster and Gypsum Board Ceilings 09 20 00 – Consider in wet locations and for

restricting access above ceilings in locker and restrooms.

Ceiling Suspension

A. Suspension Systems

(i) 6” minimum vertical clearance between structure, mechanical, plumbing, and

ceiling grid for new and remodel construction.

(ii) Recessed lighting fixtures shall have adequate space for installation. (iii) Ceiling tie wires: minimum of 6’-0” o.c. each way. One wire supporting grid at

each corner of lay-in lighting fixture. All wires supported from building structure.

Page 26 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 5 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

Interior Specialties

1. Interior Railings and Handrails

B. Metal Railings 05 52 00 - Preferred

C. Decorative Metal Railings 05 73 00

(i) Vertical rod or bar, in lieu of horizontal (ladder) installations preferred. Expanded

metal and perforated metal also preferred.

(ii) Tensioned cable - Prohibited

D. Wood Railings 06 43 16

(i) Allowed if matching existing or historic installations.

Interior Louvers 08 91

A. Interior Louvers Performance Requirements 01 84 00

(i) Provide heavy duty, metal gauge in gymnasiums, corridors and other locations

subject to impact.

Information Specialties 10 10 00

A. Visual Display Units 10 11 00

(i) Chalkboards 10 11 13 Prohibited without owner approval

(ii) Marker boards 10 11 16

a. Typical new classroom: minimum (1) 12’-0” x 4’-0” Marker board. Confirm with Owner.

b. 24 gauge minimum porcelain enamel steel facing sheet laminated to a ½” fiberboard core with aluminum backing sheet.

c. Provide integral clear anodized aluminum frame with concealed fasteners, full length tray and map rail with end stops and (1) standard map hook/clip for

every 24” of length.

d. All boards shall be backed and shimmed to prevent “bounce” and shall be completely rigid during use.

e. Marker boards in gymnasiums and high activity areas should have the marker tray mounted at the top of the board or recessed. Marker trays should have

exposed ends 1” radius minimum.

f. Provide (1) flag holder per classroom

(iii) Tack boards 10 11 23

a. Typical new classroom: minimum (2) 4’-0” x 4’-0” tack boards. Confirm with owner.

b. ¼” un-faced or vinyl faced sheet cork, bonded to ½” fiberboard with integral

clear, satin anodized aluminum frame and concealed fasteners.

B. Display Cases 10 12 002

(i) Provide lighted, lockable cases, with tempered glass doors and shelving. Glass “slide-on” type of locks prohibited. Key cylinders to building key system. Recess

case in walls or alcoves.

C. Directories 10 13 00 - Meet ADA Requirements

D. Interior Signage 10 14 00

(i) Directional

2 Updated 11/09/2016

Page 27 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 6 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

a. Meet ADA Requirements – Match existing compliant signage where possible. b. Coordinate size, titles, and wording with owner. Discuss way finding and

possible bi-lingual requirements. c. Mount with heavy duty double stick tape; provide silicone at sign’s edges to

prevent finger holds for vandals.3

d. Provide matching backer plates where signs are located on glass. e. All room numbering schemes shall be owner approved, coordinate with

existing.

(ii) Lobby Plaques4

a. Provide a bronze plaque in the school lobby or primary entrance area. The plaque shall be size 18" x 24" and will contain the following:

i. District brand, 10” wide

ii. [Arial 72pt, centered, capitalization to match following text] With deep

appreciation to the Boulder Valley School District community, this building is dedicated to the students and staff of

iii. [Arial 94pt, bold, centered, first letters capitalized] [Full Name of School]

iv. [Arial 84pt, centered] [year construction completed]

b. .25” border, background leatherette finish, letters and border in satin finish.

c. Layout must be approved by Bond Communications Specialist before production.

d. Lobby Plaque Example

Compartments and Cubicles 10 21 00

A. Toilet Compartments 10 21 13

(i) Provide phenolic or HDPE solid plastic partitions.

(ii) Provide heavy-duty stainless steel operating hardware and accessories. (iii) Consider manufacturer’s standard continuous aluminum heat-sink strips at all

exposed bottom edges of HDPE units to prevent burning. (iv) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) class B

(v) International Code Council (ICC) class B

(vi) Comply with NFPA 286 and ASTM-E84 (vii) Smoke Developed - not to exceed 450

(viii) Flame Spread Index – not to exceed 75

B. Shower & Dressing Compartments 10 21 16

(i) See toilet compartment requirements above.

Wall and Door Protection 10 26

A. Corner Guards 10 26 13

(i) Provide Acrovyn 4000 series, surface applied type or approved equal 4’-0” minimum AFF at all gypsum board and stud wall outside corners in hallways,

corridors, and locations that may be prone to damage.

(ii) Provide stainless steel corner guards in kitchen, prep, and serving areas.

3 Updated 10/02/2017 4 Added 10/02/2017

Page 28 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 7 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

Toilet Accessories 10 28 00- Provide blocking, installation reinforcement as needed. Install accessory units according to manufacturer’s instructions. All installations to meet ADA

requirements.

A. Toilet Accessories 10 28 13- Owner provided items, Contractor installed. Coordinate

requirements with owner.

(i) Soap dispensers (ii) Paper towel dispensers – Install one at every sink or lavatory.

(iii) Toilet tissue dispensers

B. Toilet Accessories 10 28 14 - Contractor furnished and installed.

(i) Grab bars- stainless steel, provide as indicated. Must withstand at least 250 lbs. of downward load. Comply with ASTM F 446.

(ii) Mirror units – Stainless steel framed units: Fabricate frame with angle shapes not

less than 0.05 inch, with square corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. ¼” silver plate glass and tamper resistant fasteners. Provide in No. 4 satin polished

finish. Use mirrors mounted at ADA height in lieu of sloped ADA mirrors. (iii) At mop sinks: install either ceramic tile wainscot to approximately 4’-0” AFF, or

install stainless steel panels to 4’-0” AFF on concrete masonry or cement backer

board above basin. Also provide mop rack with clips.

(iv) Sanitary napkin disposal units.

Storage Specialties 10 50

A. Lockers 10 51 00 ASI Lockers, DeBourgh, List Industies, Lyon, Penco or approved

equal5

(i) Standard Corridor Lockers: 12” deep x 15” wide x 36” high, 14 gauge reinforced

construction doors, 11 gauge, single- point latch, double tier, ½ lockers without

louvers. Provide with built-in recessed Master lock combination locks with control key. Consider matching predominant existing building lock system (Master lock

padlocks or built-in Master locks). Provide continuous 18 gauge sloped tops or recess lockers in walls. Provide 24 gauge sides and backs, 20 gauge bottoms, and

16 gauge boxed end panels at all locations where sides of lockers are exposed.

Recessed or masonry fin walls at ends are preferred. Locker base shall be concrete or solid 2x and plywood in finished, retrofit locations. All other

configurations, including full height (60” or 72”) lockers shall be approved by Owner.

(ii) Locker Room Lockers: Welded frame, expanded or punched metal 14 gauge

lockers with 18 gauge sloped tops. 3 point minimum, cremone, rod type latching mechanism for full height or ½ height lockers. All sizes and configurations to be

approved by owner. (iii) Music Room Lockers: As manufactured by Wenger Corporation or approved equal.

All sizes and configurations to be approved by owner.

B. Locker Room Benches 10 51 53 – No special owner requirements, consider concrete

bench integral to locker base.

C. Mail Boxes 10 55 23 – Coordinate number, size, placement, and configuration with

owner. Individual user slots, 9”x 14” minimum.

C20 INTERIOR FINISHES

Wall Finishes 09 70 00

1. Wall Finishes Performance Requirements 01 84 19

5 Changed 01/27/2016

Page 29 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 8 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

A. Kitchen, restroom, and locker room walls and ceilings must be constructed of materials

that will not suffer damage as a result of repeated cleaning.

Tile Wall Finish 09 30 00 – Consider use in areas of abuse or wet conditions.

A. Substrate: Concrete, masonry, or cement backer board.

B. Thin set mortar only; mastic prohibited. Consider tile use in:

(i) Restrooms. (ii) Shower rooms.

(iii) Kitchen

(iv) Mop sinks in custodial closets (may be partial height).

Use of thin, glazed, ceramic base discouraged at high traffic areas.

Extra Materials (owner attic stock):

A. Provide: wall, flooring, base and preformed profiles of each material and each color and

pattern. Quantities specified to be determined by consultation with owner.

Preformed single piece required at all external corners.

Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar planes,

including:

A. Joints between plumbing fixtures and tile work.

B. Inside corners: Rake out and seal. C. Door frames.

D. Wall and floor planes: Rake out and seal. E. Install bull nose profile where tile abuts dissimilar materials.

F. Cleavage membrane: Required at slabs over soils with swelling potential.

Wall Paneling

A. Wood Paneling 06 42 00 – Consider as wainscot and in historic building applications.

B. Plastic Paneling 06 64 00 – Consider FRP panels in kitchen, custodial, and serving

areas.

Wall Coverings 09 72 00 – Allowed with owner approval. Wall Carpeting 09 73 00 – Discouraged, only allowed with owner approval

Special Wall Surfacing 09 77 - Consider stainless steel in kitchen and serving areas.

Wall Painting and Coating 09 90 00

A. Kitchen, restroom and locker room areas should be painted with epoxy paint or other

approved, maintainable, non-porous finish. B. Furnish the Owner with minimum of 1 gallon of each color and type of paint used.

C. Provide owner with list, by room number, of paint color and manufacturer.

D. Provide owner with 8 ½ x 11 “draw downs” with color submittals. E. A final, revised, room paint schedule shall be included with the closeout documents for

the owner’s records. F. All paint materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the

product of a single manufacturer. G. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, non-specular black paint where visible

through registers or grilles.

H. Concrete block should have one coat of filler-sealer and a minimum of two coats of paint. At areas where epoxy paint is to be applied (toilets, kitchen areas), block filler is

to be applied with squeegee to insure that all pores are filled before application of epoxy.

I. Drywall, concrete, or plaster should have one coat of suitable primer and a minimum of

two coats of semi-gloss or eggshell enamel. J. Metal work which is factory primed, should have minimum two coats of finish.

Page 30 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 9 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

K. Exterior steel hand and guard rails shall be finished with a high performance coating (TNEMEC-primer: “Teneme Fascure” series 161, polyamide epoxy 4.0mil DFT and

TENEMEC-finish coat “Endura Shield” series 73, Aliaphaic Acrylic polyurethane 4.0 mil

DFT or approved substitute). Consider at all exposed exterior steel conditions.

Acoustic Wall Coating 09 83 13 - Discouraged

A. Acoustic Room Components 09 84 00

(i) Sound-Absorbing Wall Units 09 84 33 Consider use in music rooms, cafeterias,

gymnasiums and other acoustically loud areas.

(ii) Consider “Sound Block” to improve acoustics in block constructed rooms.

Interior Fabrications – No owner requirements.

Flooring 09 60 00

Flooring Performance Requirements 01 84 19

A. Slip Resistance 01 84 19 – Ramps, kitchen, and locker room floors shall have non-slip

surfaces. Floors around shop machinery shall also slip resistant.

Tile Flooring 09 30 00 – Use in wet areas in conjunction with wall tile. Consider in areas

where sub-slab moisture readings are high.

A. Floors: Thin set attachment only: mastic prohibited. Consider at following locations:

(i) Restrooms (ii) Locker and Shower Rooms

(iii) Kitchen

(iv) Entryways

Masonry Flooring 09 63 00 - Prohibited without owner approval. Wood Flooring 09 64 00 – Consider at stage floors in High Schools with owner approval.

Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 – Consider at corridors, art rooms, science rooms, cafeterias,

technology labs, and near sinks in classrooms.

A. Resilient VCT or Linoleum Tile - Use discouraged. Permitted in select areas with owner

approval. B. Resilient BBT – Permitted in select areas with owner approval.

C. Resilient Sheet Flooring – Preferred system with welded seams. Consider Tarkett-

Johnsonite, .080” un-backed homogenous vinyl sheet “ iQ Optima” or approved equal. D. Linoleum sheet goods discouraged, permitted only with owner approval.

E. Rubber Floor Tile – Consider at ramps and stair applications.

F. LVT – Consider at resilient flooring locations with owner approval.

Portland Cement Terrazzo Flooring 09 66 00

A. Consider at high traffic, corridor or commons areas with owner approval.

Fluid-Applied Flooring 09 67 00

A. Acrylic Flake Flooring 09 67 28 – As manufactured by Acrylic Reactive Resin by Silikal North America, Inc. or equal as approved by owner. Consider in rest room, kitchen,

locker rooms, and other wet areas.

Carpeting 09 68 00

A. Carpet Tile 09 68 13 – Consider at high traffic, corridor or commons areas.

Page 31 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 10 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(i) Allowable manufacturers: InterfaceFlor, Tandus (Collins and Aikmen), Mannington, Shaw Contract Group6, or BVSD approved equal. Coordinate with owner for

product line and other specific information.

B. Sheet (roll) Carpeting 09 68 16 – Consider at typical classrooms, offices, and

conference rooms, etc.

(i) Allowable manufacturers: Tandus (Collins and Aikmen), Mannington, Shaw Contract Group7, or BVSD approved equal. Coordinate with owner for product line

and other specific information.

Athletic Flooring Includes: Flooring for athletic purposes. DIN certification preferred. Wood

floor systems restricted to products/systems with at least five years of history in Colorado institutional applications. Moisture testing and recording required prior to installation.

Consider FSC wood products. The layout for game lines and gym floor markings will be laid

out by the Architect with owner consultation and approval.

A. Wood Athletic Flooring 09 64 66 – Preferred gymnasium system – Robbins, BioCushion

Classic, Accer, AccerFlex EN, or approved equal: floating system, maple strip over plywood sub-floor and resilient pads. No continuous padding allowed. Strips shall be

laid parallel to the long dimension of the gym. Allowance is to be made for expansion

of the floors. There shall be adequate protection from moisture gain from sub-base. Lines and school logos are to be painted with system compatible with floor finish prior

to final coat. Initial finish coats (on raw wood) shall be oil based of low VOC type. Finish must be compatible with water based finish used by district for maintaining floor

after installation.

(i) Elementary School gym floors: consider third grade and better maple and resilient

athletic sheet flooring or fluid applied flooring.

(ii) High School and Middle School gym floors: Consider second and better grade

maple. Multi-purpose areas: Consider other listed Athletic flooring below.

B. Resilient Athletic Flooring 09 65 66 – Consider Gerflor, Taraflex Sports Flooring or owner approved equal, at multi-purpose areas and retro fit projects.

C. Fluid-Applied Athletic Flooring 09 67 66 – Consider Robbins, Pulastic, (modified

polyurethane over recycled rubber pad) or owner approved equal in multi-purpose

areas and retro-fit projects.

Entrance Flooring

A. Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 12 48 13 –Prohibited without BVSD approval.

B. Entrance Tile 12 48 26 – (See section C2030 for requirements)

C. Consider Tandus (Collins and Aikmen) “Abrasive Action” carpet, Mannington “Liason

Collection” carpet entryway system or approved equal.

Stair and Ramp Finishes

Resilient Stair Finish 09 65 00 – Consider rubber treads, stringers and risers or other owner

approved non-slip materials for ramps and stairs.

Terrazzo Stair Finish 09 66 00 – allowed only with abrasive tread inserts.

Ceiling Finishes 09 50 0000

Plaster and Gypsum Board Finish 09 20 00 – Consider in wet locations and for restricting access above ceilings in locker and restrooms.

6 Added 01/27/2016 7 Added 01/27/2016

Page 32 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 11 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

Ceiling Painting and Coating 09 90 – Kitchens, restrooms, locker rooms and other wet areas shall be finished with epoxy paint, or other approved, maintainable, non-porous finishes.

Acoustical Ceiling Treatment

A. Acoustical Metal Decking 05 34 00 – Consider at all Gymnasiums, and other exposed

open structure spaces to assist in sound control.

B. Acoustic Ceiling Coating 09 83 16 – Discouraged, use only with owner approval. C. Acoustic Room Components 09 84 00- Consider at Auditoriums, vocal and instrumental

music areas to acoustically tune space.

(i) Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Units 09 84 36

(ii) Sound-Reflective Ceiling Units 09 84 39

Page 33 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 1 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

ELEMENT D: SERVICES

CONVEYING

Vertical Conveying Systems

1. Elevators

A. Elevators Performance Requirements 01 85 00

(i) Two-year warranty required by manufacturer.

(ii) Consider bid alternate for two-year extended warranty. (iii) Stipulate no use during construction in specifications

(iv) Provide all special programming required including any required for proprietary controls.

(v) Use only biodegradable hydraulic fluid.

(vi) Acceptable manufacturers are ThyssenKrupp, Kone, Otis and Schindler

B. Cab Capacity 01 85 00

(i) 5’-8” by 4’-3” and ADA compliant as a minimum. (ii) Consider next size larger for fire department gurney if any floor access is limited

for emergencies.

C. Car Load Capacity 01 85 00

(i) 2000 lb. minimum

D. Car Speed 01 85 00

(i) 150 fpm minimum

E. Electric Traction Freight Elevators 14 21 13 - Prohibited F. Hydraulic Freight Elevators 14 24 13 - Preferred

G. Electric Traction Passenger Elevators 14 21 23 - Prohibited

H. Hydraulic Passenger Elevators 14 24 23 - Preferred

I. Elevator Equipment and Controls 14 28 00

(i) Include car lighting (ii) Consider including car position indicator on control station

(iii) Consider including direction of travel indicator on control station.

(iv) Car interior panels to be plastic laminate. Provide protection during any transport or moving activity.

(v) Consider handrail at back of car. (vi) Include emergency power back-up for return to Level 1 and open door if power

outage. (vii) Include emergency light and alarm system.

(viii) Include light, receptacle and ladder in elevator pit.

(ix) Include emergency phone with 2 data cables. (x) Provide key switch operation

(xi) Provide hydraulic silencers if adjacent to classroom(s).

(xii) Provide overheat alarm in elevator room with automatic shut down.

J. Additional Requirements

(i) Provide blanket hooks and 1 complete set of full height protective blankets.

2. Lifts: No special requirements.

3. Escalators: Prohibited 4. Dumbwaiters: Prohibited

5. Moving Ramps: Prohibited

Page 34 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 2 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

Horizontal Conveying: Prohibited

PLUMBING

Domestic Water Distribution 22 11 00

1. Plumbing Fixture Water Consumption 01 86 16

A. Water Closet – 1.28 GPF maximum.

B. Urinal - 0.125 GPF maximum. C. Lavatory – 0.5 GPM maximum.

D. Shower – 2.0 GPM maximum.

2. Domestic Water Equipment

A. Domestic Water Pumps 22 11 23 – bronze or stainless steel construction. Cartridge

style pumps preferred.

B. Domestic Water Softeners 22 31 00 – no owner requirements, generally not required.

3. Domestic Water Filtration Equipment 22 32 00 – no owner requirements. Generally not

required.

4. Domestic Water Heaters Includes electric and fuel-fired equipment.

A. Electric Domestic Water Heaters 22 33 00 – generally avoid, except for point of use and with district written approval.

B. Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 34 00 – gas fired.

5. Domestic Water Heat Exchangers 22 35 00 – double wall heat exchanger required for

isolation of potable water from heating water.

6. Domestic Water Piping 22 11 – lead free solder required.

A. Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 11 19 – lead free valves and fittings required.

7. Plumbing Fixtures 22 40 00

A. Commercial Plumbing Fixtures 22 42 00

(i) Commercial Water Closets 22 42 13; No requirements.

(ii) Commercial Urinals 22 42 13; , Removable stainless steel drain screens required. (iii) Commercial Lavatories 22 42 16; Stainless steel in high abuse areas with BVSD

permission; vitreous china preferred. (iv) Commercial Sinks 22 42 16; Stainless steel 18ga preferred or as approved by

District (v) Commercial Showers 22 42 23; prefer masonry shower enclosures with ceramic

tile

(vi) Commercial Disposers 22 42 26; Insinkerator preferred or as approved by District (vii) Shampoo Bowls 22 42 29; no requirements

(viii) Wash Fountains 22 42 33; Bradley stainless steel or as approved by District (ix) Service Sink; fiberglass prohibited. Terrazzo floor receptor, 24x24” minimum

preferred.

B. Commercial Plumbing Fixture Trim 22 42 39 – Manual and Automatic valves: Chicago or

Sloan , no substitutions1.

(i) Lavatory Faucet – Chicago Faucet 802-VCP (ii) Automatic Faucet – Sloan BASYS Mid Faucets EXF-275.5002

(iii) Service Sink – wall mount – Chicago Faucet 305-VBRRCF

(iv) Kitchen Sink – wall mount – Chicago Faucet 445-L12CP

1 Updated 11/09/2016 2 Updated 11/09/2016

Page 35 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 3 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(v) Kitchen Sink – deck mount – Chicago Faucet 1100-CP (vi) Kitchen – Pre-rinse fittings – Chicago Faucet 919-LCP

(vii) Science Sink – deck mount – Chicago Faucet 930-369CP (viii) Freezeless Wall Hydrant – Woodford B67

(ix) Toilet seats – Beneke, Bemis Olsonite or approved. Solid plastic, white only.

Stainless bolts required.

C. Flush valves 22 42 43 – Sloan or Zurn, no substitutions3

D. Sensor flush valves – Battery operated Sloan OPTIMA EBV-89-A, no substitutions4

8. Emergency Plumbing Fixtures 22 45 00; tempered water required.

A. Emergency Showers 22 45 13 – provide with floor drain.

B. Eyewash Equipment 22 45 16 – provide with dedicated drain..

C. Eye/Face Wash Equipment 22 45 26 – locate over sink in science room. D. Hand-Held Emergency Drench Hoses 22 45 29 – locate over sink in science room.

E. Combination Emergency Fixture Units 22 45 33 – provide with floor drain. Prefer

Bradley S19-315BF Barrier free recessed drench shower and eye wash.

9. Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers 22 47 00

A. Drinking Fountains 22 47 13 – prefer water coolers over fountains. B. Water Coolers 22 47 23 - prefer coolers with bottle fillers. Elkay or Oasis .

C. Water coolers/bottle fillers – Elkay EZH2O

10. Domestic Water Distribution Supplementary Components

A. Mechanical Metal Supports 05 45 13 – generally provide unistrut supports. B. Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 00 – only lead free fittings are acceptable.

C. Expansion Fittings and Loops 22 05 16 – no owner requirements.

D. Meters and Gages 22 05 19 – only lead free meters and gauges are acceptable. E. Valves 22 05 23 – only lead free valves are acceptable. Ball valves required.

F. Hangers and Supports 22 05 29 – hangers and supports to be sized to accommodate pipe insulation.

G. Heat Tracing 22 05 33 – Avoid.

H. Vibration Controls 22 05 48 – piping shall be supported to prevent water hammer noise. I. Identification 22 05 53 – comply with ANSI A13.1

J. Insulation 22 07 00 – comply with energy code requirements. K. Instrumentation and Controls 22 09 00 – provide gauges with isolation valves for

monitoring system operation.

L. Backflow preventer – for hydronic systems – Watts 009

Sanitary Drainage

1. Sanitary Sewage Equipment

A. Sanitary Waste Interceptors 22 13 23 – provide solids interceptors where required by

code. Must be maintainable without removal from cabinet. B. Sanitary Waste Separators 22 13 26 – provide grease interceptors for kitchen waste.

C. Sanitary Sewage Pumps 22 13 29 – sewage pumps shall alarmed and be on emergency

power. Prefer duplex pumps for reliability. Provide grinder pumps to prevent clogging. D. Packaged, Wastewater Pump Units 22 13 36 – sewage pumps shall be on emergency

power. Prefer duplex pumps for reliability. Provide grinder pumps to prevent clogging.

2. Sanitary Sewage Piping

3 Updated 11/09/2016 4 Updated 11/09/2016

Page 36 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 4 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

A. Sanitary Sewers 22 13 13 – when work is in public highway or street, paving repairs shall comply with municipal agency requirements.

B. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 13 16 – no owner requirements. C. Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 13 19 – no owner requirements.

D. Sanitary Drains 22 13 19.13 – no owner requirements.

E. Grease Removal Devices 22 13 19.26 – Must be accessible for cleaning. 36” lid minimum. Locate grease traps outdoors.

F. Backwater Valves 22 13 19.33 – no owner requirements. G. Air-Admittance Valves 22 13 19.36 – Must be accessible for servicing.

H. Sanitary Drainage Manholes 22 05 73 – Must be accessible for sewer cleaning. I. Sanitary Drainage Piping Cleanouts 22 05 76 – Must be accessible for sewer cleaning.

75’ spacing maximum.

J. Acid Resistant Piping – Prefer PVDF piping from sinks to dilution/neutralization basin.

3. Sanitary Drainage Supplementary Components

A. Mechanical Metal Supports 05 45 13 – use unistrut supports generally. B. Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 00 – no owner requirements.

C. Expansion Fittings and Loops 22 05 16 – no owner requirements.

D. Hangers and Supports 22 05 29 – no owner requirements. E. Vibration Controls 22 05 48 – no owner requirements.

F. Identification 22 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1 G. Insulation 22 07 00 – no owner requirements.

H. Instrumentation and Controls 22 09 00 – no owner requirements. I. Acid Neutralization Basins – provide for high school and middle school labs

J. Solids Interceptors – provide for art classrooms

Building Support Plumbing Systems

1. Stormwater Drainage Equipment

A. Stormwater Drainage Pumps 22 14 33 - stormwater pumps shall be alarmed and be on emergency power. Prefer duplex pumps for reliability

B. Stormwater Drainage Sump Pumps 22 14 29 - stormwater pumps shall be alarmed and

be on emergency power. Prefer duplex pumps for reliability.

2. Stormwater Drainage Piping 22 14

A. Rainwater Leaders 22 14 16 – no owner requirements. B. Stormwater Drainage Piping Specialties 22 14 23 – no owner requirements.

C. Stormwater Drainage Manholes 22 05 73 – Must be accessible for storm drain cleaning.

D. Stormwater Drainage Piping Cleanouts 22 05 76 – Must be accessible for drain

cleaning.

3. Facility Stormwater Drains 22 14 26

A. Area Drains 22 14 26.13 – no owner requirements.

B. Roof Drains 22 14 26.16 – require cast iron domes for durability.

C. Trench Drains 22 14 26.19 – no owner requirements.

4. Building Support Plumbing System Supplementary Components

A. Mechanical Metal Supports 05 45 13 –unistrut supports preferred. B. Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 00 – no owner requirements.

C. Expansion Fittings and Loops 22 05 16 – no owner requirements. D. Meters and Gages 22 05 19 – no owner requirements.

E. Valves 22 05 23 – no owner requirements.

F. Hangers and Supports 22 05 29 – size hanger and supports to accommodate pipe insulation.

Page 37 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 5 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

G. Heat Tracing 22 05 33 – Discouraged. Limit heat tracing to exterior exposed downspouts likely to freeze.

H. Vibration Controls 22 05 48 – no owner requirements. I. Identification 22 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1

J. Insulation 22 07 00 – provide insulation to prevent condensation.

K. Instrumentation and Controls 22 09 00 – no owner requirements. L. Natural Gas Piping – Verify with Xcel Energy the gas pressure available on-site. All

exterior gas piping shall be painted with exterior-grade rust inhibiting paint. M. Emergency Natural Gas Shut-off – provide in kitchens, science labs and all areas where

students may be present or required by code.

General Service Compressed-Air 22 15 00

1. General Service Compressed-Air Piping 22 15 13 – no owner requirements.

2. General Service Compressed-Air Valves 22 15 16 – no owner requirements.

Process Support Plumbing System Supplementary components

1. Mechanical Metal Supports 05 45 13 – use unistrut supports generally.

2. Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 00 – no owner requirements.

A. Valves 22 05 23 – ball valves required. Gate valves prohibited.

B. Hangers and Supports 22 05 29 – no owner requirements. C. Vibration Controls 22 05 48 – no owner requirements.

D. Identification 22 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1

3. Insulation 22 07 00 – no owner requirements.

4. Instrumentation and Controls 22 09 00 – provide gauges with isolation valves for monitoring system operation.

HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING

1. HVAC Performance Requirements 01 86 19 – See District’s Sustainability Design Requirements for performance goals in section AA1030.5

2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 (TAB) work shall be specified to be contracted

directly to the General Contractor, not the Mechanical subcontractor.5

Facility Fuel Systems 23 10 00

1. Performance Requirements

A. Fuel System Operating Pressure 01 86 19 – verify gas service pressure with Xcel

Energy. Generally low pressure gas is available.

Heating Systems

1. Heat Generation

A. Heat Generation – prefer high efficiency equipment.

B. Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks 23 51 00 – no owner requirements.

C. Fuel-Fired Heating Boilers 23 52 006 – prefer condensing boilers; Aerco, Lochinvar, and

Patterson-Kelley. Others as approved by BVSD.

(i) Boiler(s) system should come with its own manufacturer management control system which will fire/control the Boiler(s) to maintain leaving heating water

temperature setpoint. Boiler(s) management control system shall accept BAS

signal (0-10vdc or 4-20mA) for heating water temperature setpoint. Boiler(s)

5 Added 10/02/2017 6 Modified 01/27/2016

Page 38 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 6 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

management control system shall also accept a BAS switched input signal for Boiler(s) system enable. The Boiler(s) management control system shall provide a

Modbus RTU interface for connection to the BAS. The Boiler(s) management system should come with all of the required safeties to protect their respective

equipment.7

D. Heating Boiler Feedwater Equipment 23 53 00 – use with existing steam systems only. E. Boiler Feedwater Pumps 23 53 13 – Use with existing steam systems only.

F. Deaerators 23 53 16 – use with existing steam systems only. G. Furnaces 23 54 00 Includes: Fuel-fired furnaces – natural gas. Highly discouraged.

District approval required for application. H. Ground Source Heat Pump Systems– Consider for new facilities. ClimateMaster heat

pumps preferred. Other manufacturers as approved by BVSD

I. Fuel-Fired Heaters 23 55 00 Includes: Fuel-fired radiant and unit heaters. Discouraged. District approval required.

J. Heat Exchangers for HVAC 23 57 00 – must be designed to be cleanable. Discouraged.

District approval required.

2. Thermal Heat Storage 23 71 13 – no owner requirements.

3. Decentralized Heating Equipment 23 80 00 – no owner requirements.

A. Convection Heating Units 23 82 00 – no owner requirements.

B. Chilled Beams 23 82 14 – no owner requirements. C. Air Coils 23 82 16 – provide access on both sides for coil cleaning. Provide isolation

valves and drains on coil piping. D. Fan Coil Units 23 82 19 –Discouraged. District approval required.

E. Unit Ventilators 23 82 23 – Discouraged. District approval required. If used, must be

vertical installation and ducted. Trane preferred or as approved by District8 F. Convectors 23 82 33 – no owner requirements.

G. Finned-Tube Radiation Heaters 23 82 36 –Provide 16” minimum access for valves and controls. Consider freeze protection on exterior walls.

H. Unit Heaters 23 82 39 –Locate cabinet unit heaters on wall close to floor. Ceiling mount

prohibited.

I. Radiant Heating Units 23 83 00 – no owner requirements.

4. Heating System Supplementary Components

A. Provide adequate access for servicing equipment and filter changes.

B. Mechanical Metal Supports 05 45 13 – use unistrut supports generally.

C. Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 00 – no owner requirements. D. Meters and Gages 23 05 19 – provide meters and gauges to be able to troubleshoot

system performance. E. General-Duty Valves 23 05 23 – provide adequate valving to be able to isolate portions

of the system for maintenance. Provide ball valves for service isolation. Belimo actuators for control valves or as approved by District.9 Isolation valves are required for

servicing control valves. Must provide isolation valves for boilers to avoid taking the

entire system out of service for maintenance. F. Hangers and Supports 23 05 29 – sizing of hangers and supports to be sized to

accommodate pipe insulation. G. Vibration and Seismic Controls 23 05 48 – provide vibration isolation for all rotating and

reciprocating equipment.

7 Added 03/11/2016 8 Updated 11/09/2016 9 Updated 11/09/2016

Page 39 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 7 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

H. Identification 23 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1 Mechanical equipment above ceiling shall have engraved ID tag riveted to ceiling grid in proximity to the equipment. All

mechanical equipment shall be provided with an engraved ID tag securely attached to the equipment. Labeling with paint or marker not acceptable.

I. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 – owner will contract with an independent

balancing agent. J. Insulation 23 07 00 – exterior exposed piping and ductwork shall have aluminum jacket

covering the insulation. K. Instrumentation and Control 23 09 00 – system to be controlled with District wide

Andover control system. See sample control sequences on appendix. L. Propylene glycol – Prefer new systems to be charged with 30% propylene glycol for

freeze protection. Do not use in older existing systems that have never used glycol.

Cooling Systems: Trane, York, Aaon10, and Engineered Air; no substitutions11

1. Central Cooling 23 60 00

A. Refrigerant Compressors 23 61 00 – prefer field serviceable compressors. Scroll compressors preferred or as approved by District12

B. Refrigerant Condensers 23 63 00 – provide with hail guards to protect coils.

C. Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units 23 62 00 – provide with hail guards to protect coils. Water-cooled condensers highly discouraged.

D. Water Chillers 23 64 00 –Trane preferred or as approved by District.13 Water cooled.

Screw compressors preferred.

(i) Chiller systems should be able to be hard wired for chiller enable and CHWST set point. All chiller internal safeties should be in place from the factory to protect the

chillers. If there is a management system like the boilers for the chilled water

system, it should also come with a Modbus RTU connection to pick up other additional information. If chiller has a water cooled condenser water system, that

should be controlled through the BAS for free cooling, etc.14

E. Cooling Towers 23 65 00 – provide cottonwood screens on intakes. Provide hose bibb

in area for wash down. BAC or Evapco preferred or as approved by District. Flat plate

design preferred.15

2. Evaporative Air-Cooling 23 76 – Discouraged. Only with BVSD approval. Prefer indirect

evaporative cooling where approved by BVSD. 3. Thermal Cooling Storage 23 71 00 – consider evening and weekend use of building when

sizing the system.

A. Chilled-Water Thermal Storage 23 71 16 – no owner requirements.

B. Ice Storage 23 71 19 – Discouraged.

4. Decentralized Cooling 23 80

A. Air-Conditioners – no window or through wall air conditioners accepted.

B. Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners 23 81 13 - no window or through wall air conditioners accepted.

C. Self-Contained Air-conditioners 23 81 19 - no window or through wall air conditioners

accepted.

10 Added 01/27/2016 11 Updated 11/09/2016 12 Updated 11/09/2016 13 Updated 11/09/2016 14 Added 03/11/2016 15 Updated 11/09/2016

Page 40 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 8 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

D. Computer-Room (Server rooms) Air-Conditioners 23 81 23 – prefer Liebert dry coolers with computer room air conditioners.

E. Split-System Air-Conditioners 23 81 26 – preferred for IT closet cooling. If using heat pump units, consider supplemental heat. Mitsubishi preferred or as approved by

District.16

F. Air Cooled Condensing Units – Carrier, Lennox, Daikin-McQuay, Trane, York-Johnson Controls.

G. Provide school computer labs with dedicated heating/cooling unit.

5. Unitary Heat Pumps

A. Water-Source Heat Pumps 23 81 46 - Climate Master or as approved by District.17

6. Convection Cooling Units 23 82 00 Note: Convection units may provide heating and cooling.

A. Chilled Beams 23 82 14 – no owner requirements.

B. Air Coils 23 82 16 – provide 12” x 12” min. access both sides of coil for coil cleaning. C. Fan Coil Units 23 82 19 – Discouraged.

D. Unit Ventilators 23 82 23 – Discouraged. Vertical UV’s preferred over horizontal.18

E. Convectors 23 82 33 – no owner requirements.

7. Cooling System Supplementary Components

A. Mechanical Metal Supports 05 45 13 – use unistrut supports generally. B. Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 00 – no owner requirements.

C. Meters and Gages 23 05 19 – provide meters and gauges for system troubleshooting. D. General-Duty Valves 23 05 23 – provide adequate valving for service isolation. Belimo

control valve actuators or as approved by District19. Provide isolation valves and drains both sides of control valves for servicing.

E. Hangers and Supports 23 05 29 – size hangers and supports to accommodate

insulation. F. Vibration Controls 23 05 48 - provide vibration isolation for all rotating and

reciprocating equipment. G. Identification 23 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1

H. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 – owner will contract with an independent

balancing agent. I. Insulation 23 07 00 - exterior exposed piping and ductwork shall have aluminum jacket

covering the insulation. J. Instrumentation and Control 23 09 00 - system to be controlled with District wide

Andover control system. See sample control sequences on appendix.

Facility HVAC Distribution Systems

1. Facility Hydronic Distribution

1. Hydronic Distribution Performance Requirements – comply with Sustainability Design

Requirements for performance goals. See section AA1030.5

A. Hot-Water Heating Piping Working Pressure and Temperature – no owner requirements.

B. Chilled-Water Piping Working Pressure and Temperature – no owner requirements.

C. Water Piping Working Pressure and Temperature – no owner requirements. D. Makeup-Water Piping Working Pressure and Temperature – provide makeup water to

all closed loop hydronic systems..

16 Updated 11/09/2016 17 Updated 11/09/2016 18 Modified 03/11/2016 19 Updated 11/09/2016

Page 41 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 9 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

E. Condensate-Drain Piping Working Temperature – no owner requirements. F. Blowdown-Drain Piping Working Temperature - no owner requirements.

G. Air-Vent Piping Temperature 01 86 19 – no owner requirements. H. Hydronic Pumps – Armstrong, Aurora, Bell & Gossett. All pumps shall be provided with

valves on inlet and outlet for servicing. Provide inline pumps above ceiling with drip

pans. I. Hydronic Piping System – no owner requirements.

J. Water Treatment for Hydronic Systems 23 25 00 – District generally works with Rocky Mountain Aqua Tech. Coordinate with BVSD to determine required treatment.

K. Air Separators – Amtrol, Bell & Gossett or Taco. L. Expansion Tanks – Armstrong, Bell & Gossett preferred or as approved by District20

M. Flow Venturis – IMI Hydronic Engineering, Gerand or as approved by District21

2. Facility Steam Distribution

A. Steam Distribution Performance Requirements 01 86 19 – For existing steam systems

only. Low Pressure Steam Piping Working Pressure – generally limit to 15 psi or less. B. Condensate Piping Working Pressure and Temperature – no owner requirements.

C. Makeup-Water Piping Working Pressure and Temperature – no owner requirements.

D. Steam Condensate Pump Capacity 01 86 19 – size for cold system start-up condensing. E. Steam Piping System – no owner requirements.

F. Steam Condensate Pumps 23 22 23 – prefer duplex pumps for reliability. G. Steam Piping 23 22 13 – no owner requirements.

H. Water Treatment for Steam Systems 23 25 19 – District generally works with Rocky

Mountain Aqua Tech. Coordinate with BVSD to determine required treatment.

3. HVAC Air Distribution

A. HVAC Air Distribution Performance Requirements – no owner requirements. B. Sustainable Design Requirements 01 86 19 - See District’s SMS (Sustainability

Management System) for performance goals. C. Fan Total Airflow and External Static Pressure – no owner requirements.

D. Pressure Class, Seal Class, and Leakage Class for Supply Ducts – follow SMACNA

Standards. E. Pressure Class, Seal Class, and Leakage Class for Return Ducts - follow SMACNA

Standards. F. Filtration Efficiency – 30% minimum efficient pleated filters. Consider access for

changing filters when locating units. Standard filter sizes preferred. Adapter kits may

be required to provide standard size. 2” thickness preferred.

G. Air-Handling Units – prefer packaged equipment.

(i) Packaged RTU units that are gas/electric should come with a thermostat interface board that Westover can terminate to for Fan SS, DX stage(s) enable or modulate

dependent on what the mechanical specifications call for, gas heat enable or modulate, again dependent on what specifications call for. If providing a unit

with the damper actuators, or an economizer set up, the dampers should be able

to be controlled by a 0(2)-10 VDC signal from the BAS. The unit should come with all internal safeties for the compressors and the gas heat exchanger, etc.22

20 Updated 11/09/2016 21 Updated 11/09/2016 22 Added 03/11/2016

Page 42 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 10 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(ii) Large AHUs should come stripped of any controls to be deviced by Westover if it is HW/CHW unit. If it is a gas/electric unit, the internal safeties should be in place

from the factory for the DX system and the gas heat exchanger.23

H. Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units 23 73 00 – prefer packaged equipment.

I. Packaged Outdoor HVAC Equipment 23 74 00 – provide with weather resistant housing

with adequate access doors for servicing. Removing numerous screws to remove housing panels is not acceptable. An enclosure such as penthouse preferred for

protection and servicing of equipment. J. Custom Packaged Outdoor HVAC Equipment – provide with weather resistant housing

with adequate access doors for servicing. Removing numerous screws to remove housing panels is not acceptable.

K. HVAC Air Distribution Components – Provide access for services.

L. HVAC Fans 23 34 00 – fans to have Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) rating.

M. HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 31 00 – no owner requirements. N. Air Plenums and Chases 23 32 00 – Ducted return is required if plenum space is

adequate.

O. Air Duct Accessories 23 33 00 – no owner requirements. P. Air Terminal Units 23 36 00 – no owner requirements.

Q. Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 00 – no owner requirements. R. HVAC Air Cleaning Devices 23 40 00 – no owner requirements.

S. Particulate Air Filtration 23 41 00 – filters to be minimum of 30% efficient pleated type.

Consider access for changing filters when locating units.

4. Facility Distribution Systems Supplementary Components

A. Provide access for servicing. B. Mechanical Metal Supports 05 45 13 – use unistrut supports generally.

C. Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 00 – no owner requirements. D. Expansion Fittings and Loops 23 05 16 – no owner requirements.

E. Meters and Gages 23 05 19 – provide meters and gauges for system troubleshooting.

F. General-Duty Valves 23 05 23 – provide adequate valving for service isolation. G. Hangers and Supports 23 05 29 – size supports to accommodate insulation.

H. Heat Tracing 23 05 33 – no owner requirements. I. Vibration and Seismic Controls 23 05 48 – provide vibration isolation for all rotating and

reciprocating equipment.

J. Identification 23 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1 Mechanical equipment above ceiling shall have engraved ID tag riveted to ceiling grid in proximity to the equipment. All

mechanical equipment shall be provided with an engraved ID tag securely attached to the equipment. Labeling with paint or marker not acceptable.

K. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 – owner will contract with an independent balancing agent.

L. Insulation 23 07 00 – comply with energy code requirements.

M. Instrumentation and Control 23 09 00 -

(i) Andover control system is District’s exclusive control system.

(ii) See sample control sequences in appendix.

Ventilation

1. Ventilation Performance Requirements 01 86 19

A. Sustainable Design Requirements 01 86 19 - comply with requirements of District accepted SMS (Sustainability Management System).

23 Added 03/11/2016

Page 43 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 11 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

B. Fan Total Airflow and External Static Pressure – no owner requirements. C. Pressure Class, Seal Class, and Leakage Class for Exhaust Ducts – follow SMACNA

Standards.

D. Provide direct drive fans when possible.

2. Supply Air

A. Supply Air HVAC Fans 23 34 00 – all fans to be rated by AMCA. B. Supply Air Ducts and Casings 23 31 00 – no owner requirements.

C. Supply Air Plenums and Chases 23 32 00 – no owner requirements. D. Supply Air Duct Accessories 23 33 00 – no owner requirements.

E. Supply Air Terminal Units 23 36 00 – no owner requirements. F. Supply Air Outlets 23 37 00 – no owner requirements.

G. Kitchen makeup air not to be used for conditioning of space. Provide modulating heat

control.

3. Return Air

A. Return Air HVAC Fans 23 34 00 – all fans to be rated by AMCA. B. Return Air Ducts and Casings 23 31 00 – no owner requirements.

C. Return Air Plenums and Chases 23 32 00 – no owner requirements.

D. Return Air Duct Accessories 23 33 00 – no owner requirements.

E. Return Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 00 – no owner requirements.

4. Exhaust Air

A. Pulley tensioners prohibited. Prefer direct drive exhaust fans.

B. Special Exhaust Systems 23 35 – no owner requirements. C. Air-Borne Particulate Collection Systems – generally system to be located outdoors to

aid in cleaning and noise control.

D. Sawdust Collection Systems 23 35 13.13 – generally system to be located outdoors to aid in cleaning and noise control.

E. Engine Exhaust Systems 23 35 16 – no owner requirements. F. Ventilation Hoods 23 38 00 – VFD’s prohibited.

G. Commercial Kitchen Hoods 23 38 13 – provide hoods with conditioned make up air

system. Provide modulating heating control. VFD’s prohibited. H. Fume Hood Exhaust 23 38 16 – Provide upblast type fans, consider location for odor

and grease discharge. I. Exhaust Air HVAC Fans 23 34 00 – no owner requirements.

J. Exhaust Air Ducts and Casings 23 31 00 – no owner requirements.

K. Exhaust Air Plenums and Chases 23 32 00 – no owner requirements. L. Exhaust Air Duct Accessories 23 33 00 – no owner requirements.

M. Exhaust Air Inlets 23 37 00 – no owner requirements.

5. Outside Air

A. Outside Air HVAC Fans 23 34 00 – all fans to be rated by AMCA. B. Outside Air Ducts and Casings 23 31 00 – no owner requirements.

C. Outside Air Plenums and Chases 23 32 00 – no owner requirements.

D. Outside Air Duct Accessories 23 33 00 – no owner requirements. E. Outside Air Terminal Units 23 36 00 – no owner requirements.

F. Outside Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 00 – North-facing location preferred.

6. Air-to-Air Energy Recovery 23 72 00 Includes: Air-to-air energy recovery units. Specify with

five year warranty on units. Units to be provided with a spare belt for belt drive units. Use

only to temper outside air. Plate exchanger preferred only with built-in bypass. Wheel-type should have economizer function. Direct drive preferred for heat recovery wheel.

7. HVAC Air Cleaning 23 40 00 – no owner requirements.

Page 44 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 12 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

8. Ventilation Supplementary Components

A. Mechanical Metal Supports 05 45 13 – use unistrut supports generally.

B. Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 00 – no owner requirements. C. Hangers and Supports 23 05 29 – no owner requirements.

D. Vibration and Seismic Controls 23 05 48 – provide vibration isolation on rotating

equipment. E. Identification 23 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1

F. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 05 93 – owner will contract with an independent balancing agent.

G. Insulation 23 07 00 – comply with requirements of energy code. H. Instrumentation and Control 23 09 00 – no owner requirements.

I. Commissioning Standard – in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 202P.

FIRE PROTECTION

Water-Based Fire Suppression

1. Fire Pumps 21 30 00 – no owner requirements.

2. Fire-Suppression Piping 21 11 00 – no owner requirements. 3. Fire-Suppression Standpipes 21 12 00 – no owner requirements.

4. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 21 13 00 - no owner requirements.

5. Fire Extinguishing

A. Wet-Chemical Fire-Extinguishing Systems 21 23 00 - no owner requirements.

B. Dry-Chemical Fire-Extinguishing Systems 21 24 00 - no owner requirements.

6. Fire Suppression Supplementary Components

A. Mechanical Metal Supports 05 45 13 – use unistrut supports generally. B. Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 05 00 - no owner requirements.

C. Expansion Fittings and Loops 21 05 16 - no owner requirements.

D. Meters and Gages 21 05 19 – provide meters and gauges for system monitoring. E. General-Duty Valves 21 05 23 – provide valves requires for system service isolation.

F. Hangers and Supports 21 05 29 - no owner requirements. G. Heat Tracing 21 05 33 - no owner requirements.

H. Vibration Controls 21 05 48 - no owner requirements. I. Identification 21 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1

J. Insulation 21 07 00 - no owner requirements.

K. Instrumentation and Control 21 09 00 - no owner requirements.

L. Backflow devices: locate 48” above finished floor maximum.

Fire Protection Specialties

1. Fire Protection Cabinets 10 44 13 – provide cabinet in fire riser room for spare sprinkler

heads.

2. Fire Extinguishers 10 44 16 – provide dry chemical ABC extinguishers.

3. Fire Extinguisher Accessories 10 44 43

A. Lockable fire extinguisher cabinets B. Recessed or semi-recessed cabinets preferred24

C. Review cabinet type with Project Manager25

ELECTRICAL

Facility Power Generation Performance Requirements

24 Added: 01/27/2016 25 Added: 01/27/2016

Page 45 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 13 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

1. Voltage 01 86 26 – generally 208 or 480 v 3 phase. 2. Power Output Ratings 01 86 26 – no owner requirements.

3. Packaged Generator Assemblies 26 32 00 - no owner requirements.

A. Engine Generators 26 32 13 – to be natural gas fueled, Onan and Generac preferred or

as approved by District26

B. Wind Energy Equipment 26 32 23 - no owner requirements. C. Uninterruptible Power Systems 26 32 33 - no owner requirements. See IT

requirements.

4. Photovoltaic Collectors 26 31 00 - no owner requirements.

5. Power Filtering and Conditioning 26 35 00 - no owner requirements. 6. Transfer Switches 26 36 00 - Onan and Generac preferred. Generally same manufacturer as

generator.

7. Facility Power Generation Supplementary Components

A. Electrical Metal Supports 05 45 16 – use unistrut supports generally.

B. Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - no owner requirements. C. Grounding and Bonding 26 05 26 - no owner requirements.

D. Hangers and Supports 26 05 29 - no owner requirements.

E. Raceways and Boxes 26 05 33 - no owner requirements. F. Vibration Controls 26 05 48 - no owner requirements.

G. Identification 26 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1 H. Wiring Connectors 26 05 83 - no owner requirements.

I. Instrumentation and Control 26 09 00 - no owner requirements.

Electrical Service and Distribution

1. Electrical Service 26 21 - no owner requirements.

A. Transformers 26 12 00 - no owner requirements. B. Switchgear and Switchboards 26 13 00 - Siemens, Square D, Eaton preferred or as

approved by District27. Provide capability to monitor status of main gear. C. Protection Devices 26 18 00 - Siemens, Square D, Eaton preferred or as approved by

District.28 Bolt-on devices required.

2. Power Distribution 26 20 00 - no owner requirements.

3. Switchboards and Panel boards 26 24 00 - no owner requirements.

A. Switchboards 26 24 13 - no owner requirements.

B. Panelboards 26 24 16 - no owner requirements.

4. Bus Assemblies 26 25 00 - no owner requirements.

5. Distribution Equipment 26 27 00 - no owner requirements.

A. Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures 26 27 16 - no owner requirements.

6. Electrical Wiring System

A. Raceways and Enclosures 26 05 33 - no owner requirements.

B. Ducts 26 05 43 - no owner requirements.

C. Wiring 26 05 13 - no owner requirements.

7. Facility Grounding 26 05 26 - no owner requirements.

A. Raceways 26 05 33 - no owner requirements.

26 Updated 11/09/2016 27 Updated 11/09/2016 28 Updated 11/09/2016

Page 46 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 14 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

B. Wiring 26 05 13 - no owner requirements.

8. Electrical Service and Distribution Supplementary Components

A. Electrical Metal Supports 05 45 16 - no owner requirements. B. Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - no owner requirements.

C. Grounding and Bonding 26 05 26 - no owner requirements.

D. Hangers and Supports 26 05 29 - no owner requirements. E. Raceways and Boxes 26 05 33 - no owner requirements.

F. Vibration Controls 26 05 48 – transformers shall be provided with vibration isolation. G. Identification 26 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1

H. Wiring Connectors 26 05 83 - no owner requirements.

I. Instrumentation and Control 26 09 00 - no owner requirements.

General Purpose Electrical Power

1. Branch Wiring System

A. Raceways and Enclosures 26 05 33 - no owner requirements.

B. Ducts 26 05 43 - no owner requirements. C. Wiring 26 05 19 – In computer rooms provide circuiting based on nameplate rating of

computers.

2. Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - no owner requirements.

3. General Purpose Electrical Power Supplementary components

A. Electrical Metal Supports 05 45 16 - no owner requirements. B. Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - no owner requirements.

C. Grounding and Bonding 26 05 26 - no owner requirements. D. Hangers and Supports 26 05 29 - no owner requirements.

E. Raceways and Boxes 26 05 33 - no owner requirements.

F. Vibration Controls 26 05 48 - no owner requirements. G. Identification 26 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1

H. Wiring Connectors 26 05 83 – Wire nuts preferred over stab-on connectors I. Instrumentation and Control 26 09 00 - no owner requirements.

J. Variable Frequency Drives –manufacturers – Siemens, ABB no substitutions29

K. Motor Starters –manufacturers – Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, Square D or as

approved by District30

Lighting

1. Lighting Performance Requirements 01 86 26

A. Sustainable Design Requirements 01 86 26 - comply with requirements of District

accepted SMS. B. Lighting Levels for Various Areas of Facility

C. Administrative Offices – 50 fc D. Auditorium – 10 fc

E. Restrooms – 15 fc F. Cafeteria – 30 fc

G. Kitchen – 50 fc

H. Classrooms – 35 fc I. Computer labs – 30 fc

J. Gymnasium – 30 fc , High School competitive – 75 fc K. Corridors – 30 fc

29 Updated 11/09/2016 30 Updated 11/09/2016

Page 47 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 15 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

L. Media center – stacks – 30 fc, reading area – 40 fc M. Locker rooms – 10 fc

N. Exterior Areas

(i) Pedestrian areas – 5 fc

(ii) Surrounding building areas – 1 fc

(iii) Parking areas – 1 to 3 fc generally (iv) Roadways – 2 fc

(v) High School football – competitive – 50 fc

(vi) High School tennis – competitive – 60 fc

2. Lighting Control 26 09 23

A. To facilitate system maintainability and reduced first cost, provide an architectural

design that allows the simplest form of lighting controls required by code. The district

prefers non-networked distributed controls. Continuous dimming is undesirable in instructional spaces due to occupant complaints. Notify district when the design of a

space will require continuous dimming.

(i) Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 – no owner requirements.

(ii) Lighting Control Panels 26 09 26 – Watt Stopper, Blue Box, Crestron, or as

approved by District.31 (iii) Central Dimming Control 26 09 33 – discouraged.

(iv) Modular Dimming Control 26 09 36 – no owner requirements. (v) Network Lighting Control 26 09 43 – discouraged.

(vi) Theatrical Lighting Control 26 09 61 – ETC control boards or as approved by

District.32

3. Branch Wiring for Lighting

A. Raceways and Enclosures 26 05 33 – no owner requirements. B. Ducts 26 05 43 – no owner requirements.

C. Wiring 26 05 19 – no owner requirements.

D. Wiring Devices 26 27 26 – no owner requirements.

4. Lighting Fixtures 26 50

A. Interior Lighting 26 51 00 – prefer LED fixtures. Replaceable LED drivers. Specify fixtures whose replacement parts are readily available.

B. Emergency Lighting 26 52 00 – require LED fixtures. Lithonia EU2 LED M12 C. Exit Signs 26 53 00 – require LED fixtures. Without emergency lights Lithonia LQM SW

3G 120/277 ELN, with emergency lights Lithonia LHQM LED G HO.

D. Classified Location Lighting 26 54 00 – no owner requirements. E. Special Purpose Lighting 26 55 00 – no owner requirements.

F. Security Lighting 26 55 53 – prefer LED fixtures.

G. Theatrical Lighting 26 55 61 - prefer dimmable LED fixtures.

5. Lighting Supplementary Components

A. Electrical Metal Supports 05 45 16 – use unistrut supports generally.

B. Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 – no owner requirements.

C. Grounding and Bonding 26 05 26 – no owner requirements. D. Hangers and Supports 26 05 29 – no owner requirements.

E. Raceways and Boxes 26 05 33 – no owner requirements. F. Vibration Controls 26 05 48 – no owner requirements.

31 Updated 10/02/2017 32 Updated 11/09/2016

Page 48 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 16 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

G. Identification 26 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1 H. Wiring Connectors 26 05 83 – no owner requirements.

I. Instrumentation and Control 26 09 00 – Occupancy sensors and controls to be

WattStopper.

Miscellaneous Electrical Systems

1. Lightning Protection

A. Lightning Protection for Structures 26 41 13 – no owner requirements.

B. Lightning Protection and Dissipation 26 41 16 – no owner requirements. C. Lightning Protection Surge Arresters and Suppressors – no owner requirements.

D. Lightning Protection Performance Requirements – no owner requirements.

2. Transient Voltage Suppression 26 43 00 – no owner requirements.

3. Miscellaneous Electrical Systems Supplementary Components

A. Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 – no owner requirements. B. Grounding and Bonding 26 05 26 – no owner requirements.

C. Hangers and Supports 26 05 29 – no owner requirements. D. Raceways and Boxes 26 05 33 – no owner requirements.

E. Vibration Controls 26 05 48 – no owner requirements.

F. Identification 26 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.1 G. Wiring Connectors 26 05 83 – no owner requirements.

H. Instrumentation and Control 26 09 00 – no owner requirements.

COMMUNICATIONS Data Communications: See BVSD IT specifications in Appendix

Voice Communications: See BVSD IT specifications in Appendix

Audio-Video communication

1. Audio-Video Systems 27 41 00

A. Architecturally Integrated Audio-Video Equipment

(i) Gym Sound Systems

a. Built-in preferred over portable systems b. Fire alarm override required

c. PA override required. d. Design speaker layout based on gym design.

e. On-off amplifiers only.

f. No programmable amplifiers. g. Bluetooth capability

h. Lockable cabinets

(ii) Auditorium

a. Fire alarm override required

b. PA override required. c. On-off amplifiers only.

d. No programmable amplifiers.

e. Lockable cabinets

2. Electronic Digital Systems 27 42 00

A. Point of Sale Systems 27 42 13

(i) Coordinate with Project Manager and BVSD Food Services

Distributed Communications and Monitoring

Page 49 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 17 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

1. Distributed Audio-Video Communications Systems 27 51 00

A. Paging Systems 27 51 13

(i) at high school level only.

B. Public Address and Mass Notification Systems 27 51 16

(i) integral with fire system

C. Sound Masking Systems 27 51 19; prohibited

D. Intercommunications and Program Systems 27 51 2333

(i) For system upgrades, use Rauland Campus; for full system replacements, use

Hubbell; no substitutions34

a. Call buttons required at elementary and middle level b. Provide 4 hour UPS backup

c. If emergency generator available, connect to emergency circuit

d. VOIP compatible - BVSD is transitioning from a locally-hosted Avaya VOIP system to a cloud-hosted FluentStream VOIP system, which will be completed

by January 2019. Check with Project Manager for status of transition.35 e. Provide satellite punch-down blocks at intermediate building zone locations.

Locate in IT closets.

f. System shall provide a minimum of 60db at all areas within 50 feet of outside building, where speakers are tapped at no higher than 7 watts

g. System shall provide a minimum of 60db (with no ambient noise) at all areas inside building, where speakers are tapped at no higher than .625 watts.

h. All classrooms, offices, gyms, auditorium, cafes, and libraries shall be home run to the main intercom rack.

i. Bathrooms, locker rooms, corridors and hallways shall be run in series with

each other no T-taps allowed. j. Any rooms not specified in the above list, shall be verified with BVSD

Maintenance for proper wiring prior to install. k. All Amplifiers shall not exceed 70% capacity.

l. All Zones shall have individual Amplifiers.

m. Ability to selectively communicate to monitor individual classrooms in emergency situations; all communication within the classroom shall be hands

free and will not require any interaction by the end-user to answer (Intercom system only).

n. Two-way communication between any telephone and any room speaker

(Intercom system only). o. Zone Programming shall be approved by BVSD prior to final acceptance.

p. Pre Recorded messages shall be approved by BVSD prior to final acceptance. q. Sixteen (16) separate paging zones shall be provided; each location shall be

programmed in software to belong to any combination of software zones. Initially, zones Initially, zones shall be provided for the following:

r. The administrative phones shall be located in the office and where

indicated on the plans. s. Confer with Project Manager if the building does not meet these specifications

to determine if intercom shall be included in scope.

(ii) Assistive Listening Systems 27 51 26- no owner requirements

33 Changed 01/27/2016 34 Updated 10/02/2017 35 Updated 10/02/2017

Page 50 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 18 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

2. Distributed Systems 27 53 00

A. Clock systems 27 53 1336

(i) Manufacturer: Sapling, no substitutions

a. Sapling, Inc.

1633 Republic Road

Huntingdon Valley, PA 19006 Phone: 215.322.6063

Fax: 215.322.8498 Web: www.Sapling-Inc.com

b. Approved Vendors: Equipment manufacturer-certified installers shall be used to complete this work to protect the district’s interest and keep the equipment

warranty valid. A list of vendors with who we have had successful experience

with in recent projects is available upon request. Installation vendor must be

pre-approved by BVSD Maintenance Director.

(ii) Transmitter/Transceiver: The Master Clock / Transmitter shall be the Sapling SMA 2000 Transceiver.

(iii) Repeater: The repeater (if needed) shall be a Sapling Wireless Repeater.

(iv) Analog Clock: The secondary clock shall be Sapling SAL Series wireless clock. (v) AC powered preferred

(vi) Installation and startup of all systems shall be under the direct supervision of Sapling/Sapling Rep. PM regularly engaged in installation, repair, and maintenance

of such systems. The contractor shall be accredited by the proposed equipment manufacturers.

(vii) Provide up to 2 in-service training visits for school personnel end users in the

operation of this system. Operators Manuals and Users Guides shall be provided at the time of this training. BVSD clock technicians shall be factory trained on any

new features or software new to system. Installer shall provide up to 2 visits after

final acceptance for onsite adjustments.

Communications Supplementary Components

1. Supplementary Components: no owner requirements

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

Access Control and Intrusion Detection SEE BVSD SECURITY SPECS

Electronic Surveillance 28 20 00 SEE BVSD SECURITY SPECS

Detection and Alarm

1. Fire Detection and Alarm 28 31 00

A. BVSD-approved fire alarm design consultant required to be a part of design team

B. Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems 28 31 11

(i) Manufacturers37: Silent Knight / Farenhyt; no substitutions (ii) See Appendix for outline specifications38

C. Zoned Fire-Alarm Systems prohibited

D. Spark detection: dry systems preferred

2. Fuel-Gas Detection and Alarm 28 33 00- no owner requirements

3. Refrigeration Detection and Alarm 28 35 00 – coordinate with Project Manager

36 Changed 01/27/2016 37 Changed 01/27/2016 38 Added 02/24/2016

Page 51 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 19 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

4. Water Intrusion Detection and Alarm 28 36 00 – no owner requirements

INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

Integrated Automation Facility Controls 25 50 00

1. Integrated Automation Control of HVAC Systems – Building automation system to be by Andover Controls.

2. Integrated Automation Supplementary Components

A. Conductors and Cables 25 05 13 – generally twisted shielded pairs.

B. Grounding and Bonding 25 05 26 – no owner requirements.

C. Pathways 25 05 28 – no owner requirements. D. Vibration and Seismic Controls 25 05 48 – no owner requirements.

E. Identification 25 05 53 - comply with ANSI A13.

Page 52 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 1 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

ELEMENT E: EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS

EQUIPMENT Vehicle Servicing Equipment: No owner requirements

Commercial Equipment

1. Food Service Equipment (11 41 00)

A. MATERIALS

(i) Metals: Stainless Steel (S/S): Except as otherwise indicated, provide AISI Type 304 or 305, hardest workable temper, with No. 4 directional polish applied either prior

to or after forming, except finish on non-exposed surfaces may be No. 2D or 2B.

a. Provide Type 316 S/S for work exposed to high temperatures or high

acid/chloride exposure.

b. Provide Type 420/440 S/S for cutters, valves, shafts, and other machined parts in food service equipment.

c. At Contractor's option, provide Type 409 in lieu of Type 304/305 for splash zone and on-food zone applications; except do not use Type 409 mixed with

Type 304/305 on units of equipment exposed to customer view or combined in ways which might result in electrolytic or galvanic corrosion of either metal.

d. At Contractor's option, in lieu of No. 4 directional polish, provide No. 3

directional polish for splash zone and non-food zone surfaces. e. Provide protective covering on polished surfaces of S/S sheet work and

retain/maintain until time of final testing, cleaning, start-up, and substantial

completion.

(ii) Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A526, except ASTM A 527 for extensive forming;

ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment.

a. Where unpainted exposure in food service equipment is indicated, provide

special sheet with extra smooth surface, produced by temper rolling of minimum-spangle galvanized sheet.

b. Where painted finish is indicated, provide mill phosphatized treatment in lieu

of chemical treatment. c. Where factory-applied finish of porcelain or baked-on synthetic enamel is

indicated for exposed face of galvanized steel sheet, differentially coated sheet complying with ASTM A525 may be provided at manufacturer's option.

d. Steel Sheet: ASTM A569 hot-rolled carbon steel. e. Stainless Steel Tube: Provide seamless or welded tubing complying with ASTM

A270, Finish 120, 180, or R for food conveying piping. Provide tubing complying

with ASTM A651 for water and drain/waste/vent service, Grade H for water and Grade G for SWN; and complying with ASTM A554 for framing/structural

support services; A IS I type and finish number matching food service equipment at location of use, Type 304 with No. 4 directional polish where

matching of other S/S work is not required.

f. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASTM A 120, welded or seamless, Schedule 40, galvanized.

g. Steel Structural Members: Hot-rolled or cold-formed carbon steel unless stainless steel is indicated.

h. Galvanized Finish: ASTM A123 hot-dipped zinc coating, applied after fabrication.

i. Aluminum: ASTM B 209.B 221 sheet, plate, and extrusions (as indicated); alloy,

temper, and finish as determined by manufacturer/fabricator, except 0.40 mill

clear anodized finish on exposed work unless another finish is indicated.

Page 53 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 2 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(iii) Hardwood Work Surfaces: Not permitted.

(iv) Insulation:

a. Cooled-Component Insulation: Rigid, closed-cell polyurethane foam; either heat aged slab stock for adhesive lamination with face sheets, or foamed-in-

place using Freon 11 as expanding agent; K-value of 0.15; not less than 1.7

lbs. per cu. ft. density. b. Heated-Component Insulation: Rigid board, semi-rigid blanket or adhesively

applied blanket of glass fiber or other non-asbestos mineral fiber simulation, certified by manufacturer to withstand long-term exposure to heat

(temperature rating of each insulated equipment item) without deterioration;

K-value of not more than 0.30; density of not less than 1.5 lbs. per cu. ft.

(v) Joint Materials:

a. Sealants: One part or two part, polyurethane or silicone based, liquid elastomeric sealant, FS TT-S-00227E, FS TT-S -00230C , or FS TT-S-001543A

, non-solvent-release type, mildew resistant, Shore A hardness of 30 except 45

if subject to traffic or similar abuse.

i. Except for Non-Food Contact Surfaces: Provide silicone-based sealant

only. ii. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene road stock, larger than joint width.

iii. Gaskets: Solid or hollow (but not cellular) neoprene or polyvinyl chloride; light gray, minimum of 40 shore A hardness, self-adhesive or prepared for

either adhesive application or mechanical anchorage.

(vi) Paint and Coatings:

a. General : Provide thermosetting types of painting and coating materials which,

after drying, setting, or curing are suitable for use in conjunction with food service and which are durable, non-toxic, non-dusting, non-flaking, mildew

resistant, and comply with governing regulations and NSF recommendations for food service.

b. Sound Deadening: Heavy-bodied resinous coating, filled with granulated cork

or other resilient material, compounded for permanent, non-flaking adhesion

to metal in a 1/8" thick coating.

(vii) PREFABRICATED PRODUCTS

a. Hardware: General : Manufacturer's standard, but not less than compliance

with ANSI A156.9 (BHMA Std. 201) Type 2 (Institutional), and ANSI A 156.11

(BMHA Std. 511) Grade 1, satin finish stainless steel or dull chrome finish on

brass, bronze, or steel .

i. Cabinet Catches: Heavy-duty magnetic type, except as otherwise indicated.

ii. Drawer Slides: 250 lbs. capacity ball-bearing type, sidemounting, self-closing, sizes in accordance with slide manufacturer's recommendations

for drawer size.

iii. Sliding Door Hardware: Overhead track with tandem nylon wheel hangers for door leaves over 5 SF area; rollerless sanitary slides for smaller doors

(comply with NSF standards).

b. Casters: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by caster

manufacturer for type and weight of equipment supported; but not less than

4" diameter with 15/16" tread width, with sealed self-lubricating ball-bearings, cadmium-plated steel disk wheels and solid light gray synthetic rubber tires.

Page 54 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 3 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

Provide S/S horns and accessories. Unless otherwise indicated, equip each item with 2 swivel-type casters and 2 fixed casters, and provide foot brakes on 2

casters. All assemblies shall be NSP approved.

c. Plumbing Fittings, Trim, and Accessories:

i. General: Where exposed or semi-exposed, provide bright chrome-plated

brass or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed.

ii. Water Outlets: At sinks and at other locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic, or remote control), provide commercial quality

faucets, valves, dispensers, or fill devices of type and size indicated and as required to operate as indicated.

iii. Vacuum Breakers: Provide with food service equipment where indicated

in itemized specifications. iv. Waste Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide 2" remote-lever

waste valve and 3.5" strainer basket.

d. Electrical Materials:

i. General: Provide standard materials, devices, and components as

recommended by manufacturer/fabricator, selected and installed in accordance with NEMA standards and recommendations; and as required

for safe and efficient use and operation of food service equipment, without objectionable noise, vibrations, and unsanitary conditions.

ii. Controls and Signals: Provide recognized commercial-grade signals, "On-Off" push buttons or switches, and other speed and temperature controls

as required for operation of each item, complete with pilot lights and

permanent signs and graphics to assist user of each item. Provide S/S cover plates at controls and signals.

iii. Connections: Equip each item requiring electrical power with either terminal box or cord and plug for interruptible connection as indicated.

iv. Motors: Totally enclosed type, except drip-proof type where not exposed

to dust or moisture condition; ball-bearings, except sleeve bearings on non-continuous duty motors of 1/25 hp and less and on small timing

motors; windings impregnated to resist moisture; horse power and duty cycle ratings as required for the service indicated.

v. Power Characteristics: Refer to Division 16 sections for project power

characteristics. Also, refer to individual equipment requirements for loads and ratings.

vi. Nameplates: Where possible, locate nameplates and levels on manufactured items in accessible position, but not within customer's

normal view. Do not apply nameplates or labels on custom fabricated work, except as required for compliance with governing regulations,

insurance requirements, or operator performance.

B. FABRICATION OF METALWORK

(i) General Fabrication Requirements: Remove burrs, sheared edges of metal work,

ease corners, and smooth to eliminate cutting hazard. Bend sheets of metal at not less than minimum radius required to avoid grain-separation in the metal. Maintain

flat, smooth surfaces without damage to finish. Where possible, fabricate work from

single sheet to minimize seaming.

a. Reinforce metal at locations of hardware, anchorages, and accessory

attachments where metal is less than 14 gauge or requires mortized

Page 55 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 4 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

application. Conceal reinforcements to greatest extent possible. Weld in place on concealed faces.

b. Where fasteners are permitted, provide Phillips head, flat or oval head machine screws. Cap threads with acron nuts unless fully concealed in inaccessible

construction; and provide nuts and lockwashers unless metal for tapping is at

least 12 gauge. Match fastener head finish with finish of metal fastened. c. Where components of fabricated metal work are indicated to be galvanized and

involve welding or machining of metal heavier than 16 gauge, complete fabrication, to greatest extent possible (depending upon available dip-tank

sized). Comply with ASTM A123.

i. Where hot-dipped galvanizing after fabrication of welded work is not

possible, solder over weld-damaged area of zinc coating. Apply high

temperature lead/tin solder on one side, followed by lower-temperature lead/tin solder on reverse side of each welded seam.

ii. Where vents are required for enclosed spaces or for cabinet enclosures, provide removable stainless steel insect screens of 18 x 18 mesh. Locate

vents to avoid moisture penetration during cleaning of equipment.

iii. Provide removable panels for access to mechanical and electrical service connections and operating components which are concealed behind or

within food service equipment but only where access is not possible and

not indicated through other work.

(ii) Metal and Gauges: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate exposed metal work of stainless steel, fabricate the following components from gauge of metal indicated,

and fabricate other components from not less than 20-gauge metal.

a. Table Tops: 14 Gauge b. Counter Tops: 14 Gauge

c. Shelves: 16 Gauge d. Front Drawer/Door Panels: 28 Gauge (Double-Pan Type)

e. Single-Pan Doors & Drawer Fronts: 16 Gauge

f. Enclosed Base Cabinets: 18 Gauge g. Enclosed Wall Cabinets: 18 Gauge

h. Sinks and Drainboards: 14 Gauge i. Sink Compartment Covers: 14 Gauge

j. Exhaust Hoods: 28 Gauge

k. Pan-Type Inserts & Trays: 16 Gauge l. Removable Covers, Panels: 18 Gauge

m. Skirts & Enclosure Panels: 18 Gauge n. Closure & Trim Strips Over 4" Wide: 18 Gauge

o. Hardware Reinforcement: 18 Gauge

p. Gusset Plates 10 Gauge

(iii) Work-Surface Fabrication: Fabricate metal work surfaces by forming and welding to

provide seamless construction, using welding rods matching sheet metal, grinding and polishing where necessary for disassembly; provide waterproof gasketed draw-

type joints with concealed bolting.

a. Reinforce work surfaces 18" o.c. both ways with galvanized or stainless

concealed structural members. Reinforce edges which are not self-reinforced

[by forming. b. Sound deaden underside of metal work surfaces, including sinks and similar

units, with a coating of sound deadening material. Apply as specified by local

health department.

Page 56 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 5 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(iv) Structural Framing: Except as otherwise indicated, provide framing of not less than 1" nominal pipe or tube members with mitered and welded joints and gusset plates,

ground smooth. Provide S/S tube framing for exposed work exposed to customer view, with minimum 0.064" wall thickness. Provide either S/S tube (minimum 0.064"

wall) or, where permitted by NSF standards, epoxy-polyester enameled steel pipe

for exposed work not exposed to customer view. Provide galvanized steel pipe for concealed framing where acceptable under NSF standards; otherwise provide S/S

tube (minimum 0.064" wall). (v) Enclosures: Provide enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts for service

lines, operating components, and mechanical and electrical devices associated with food service equipment, except as specifically indicated or otherwise required to be

"open."

(vi) Casework: At fabricator's option, and unless otherwise indicated, provide either box-type face framing or open channel-type (complying with NSF requirements in either

case).

a. Enclosure: Except as otherwise indicated, provide each unit of case work (base,

wall, overhead, and freestanding) with a complete-enclosure metal cabinet,

including fronts, backs, tops, bottoms, and sides. b. Door and Drawer Fronts: Except where single-pan construction is indicated,

provide double-pan type, not less than 5/8" thick, with seams on inside face. Weld hardware reinforcement to inside of inner pan. Sound deaden by either

coating both pans on concealed face or by inserting mineral wood insulation between pans.

c. Shelves: Except as otherwise indicated, provide adjustable standards for

positioning and support of shelves in case work. Turn back edge of shelf units up 2" and hem. Turn other edges down to form open channel. Reinforce shelf

units to support 40 lbs. per sq. ft. loading, plus 100% impact loading. d. Drawer Bodies: Except as otherwise indicated, provide seamless construction;

either draw formed single piece metal or draw-formed single piece metal insert

and framed metal drawer.

i. Plastic Units: At Contractor's option and unless otherwise indicated,

drawer inserts may be of molded plastic (seamless), and drawer bodies of less than 0.75 cu. Ft. capacity may be of solid, molded, seamless plastic

construction.

ii. Closed Base: Where casework is indicated to be located on a raised floor base, prepare casework for support without legs and for anchorage and

sealant application as required for a completely enclosed and concealed

base.

e. Support Floor: Equip floor-supported mobile units with casters, and equip items indicated as "roll out" units with manufacturer's standard one-directional

rollers. Otherwise, and except for "closedbase" units, provide pipe or tube legs

with adjustable bullet-design feet for floor supported items of fabricated metal

work. Provide 1" adjustment of feet (concealed threading).

(vii) Exhaust Fabrication: Comply with NFPA No. 96, including Appendix A.

a. Grease Removal: Provide type indicated (removable S/S extractor filters if not

otherwise indicated) with drip-channel gutters, drains, and collection basins.

b. Light Fixtures: Provide UL-listed fluorescent fixtures outside the hood with sealed safety lenses flush with inside of hood; S/S exposed conduit for wiring

unless otherwise indicated.

Page 57 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 6 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

c. Exhaust Duct: Galvanized steel, except S/S where exposed to view inside the building. Provide all exposed-to-view ductwork as indicated. All other ductwork

by mechanical subcontractor. d. Fire Extinguishing System: CO system complying with NFPA No. 12, dry

chemical system 2 complying with NFPA No. 17 and 96, or liquid fire

suppressant system complying with applicable NFPA regulations as specified.

(viii) Shop Painting: Clean and prepare metal surfaces to be painted; remove rust and

dirt. Apply treatment to zinc-coated surfaces which have not been mill-phosphatized. Coat welded and abraded areas of zinc-coated surfaces with galvanized repair paint.

Apply manufacturer's standard metal enamel finish.

a. Bake primer (if any) and finish coatings in accordance with paint manufacturer's

instructions for baked enamel finish.

C. PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

(i) General: Fabricate plastic laminate casework in types and styles indicated, with

hardware and accessories. Provide exposed and semi-exposed surfaces and edges (self-edged) with plastic laminate covering on particleboard cores. At fabricator's

option, semi-exposed surfaces with exposures equivalent to no more than underside

of shelves may be surfaced with plastic laminate backer sheet. Provide pointed

plywood or hardboard for concealed panels.

a. Provide adjustable standards for positioning and support of shelves. b. Provide seamless rigid molded plastic drawer bodies or drawer liner inserts,

white except as otherwise indicated.

c. Comply with applicable standards of AWI "Custom Grade" casework.

D. REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT

(i) General: Provide either single or multiple compressor units, as specified. Provide units of capacities indicated, arranged to respond to evaporator thermostats and

defrosting timers. Include coils, receivers, compressors, motors, motor starters, mounting bases, vibration isolation units, fans, dryers, valve piping, insulation,

gauges, pump-down cycle units, and complete automatic control system.

a. Refrigerant: Pre-charge units with type or types recommended by manufacturer for services indicated.

b. Provide water-cooled condensers where indicated, ready for piping connections with condenser water piping and drain or return. Locate units with

compressors, complete with refrigerant piping installed at the factory.

c. Provide air-cooled condensers where indicated, located with the compressors, complete with refrigerant piping installed at the factory. Locate units as shown.

Exterior units with weather housings, protective enclosures, and low ambient kits.

d. Do not put units on top of walk-in boxes. Place units in room close to walk-in boxes, or, if that is not an option, locate units on the rooftop of the school.

e. Coordinate cooler/freezer floor heights to match kitchen floor height. Loading

of units with hand trucks should be element of design.

E. CARBON DIOXIDE (CO ) EQUIPMENT

(i) General: Where equipment requires connection with compressed CO cylinder for operation, provide 2 cylinder manifold and control system (integral with equipment)

with proper connectors for Department of Transportation (DOT) approved type

cylinders and complete with cylinder safety devices and supports. Comply with ANSI

Page 58 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 7 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

B57.1 "Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connection," and comply

with applicable recommendations by Compressed Gas Association.

F. KITCHEN EQUIPMENT (Exact schedule is project-dependent and must be approved by

BVSD Food Service and Maintenance Departments.)1

(i) Service Counter/Steam Table

a. Manufacturer: Volrath or equal b. Model No.: C-6-HF

c. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following:

i. Provide with 12" solid ribbed tray slide and required connections to adjacent components.

ii. Stainless steel fronts and 6" adjustable legs in lieu of casters; verify height

with BVSD

d. Provide Two individual hot wells.

i. fully welded 18-gauge stainless steel with radius corners. Furnish with 3/4" stainless steel drain. Provide individual thermostatic controls for each well

recessed in apron. (12-3 cord, 6-30P cap). (Wells for moist heat only.)

ii. Two wells to accept four 12" x 20" pans (opening size 19-7/8" x 39-3/4")

with standard adapter bars

e. Provide serving shelf on top of all service counters at customer side.

f. Must include filler faucet & drain

(ii) Sneeze Guard

a. Manufacturer: Con-tur Health Guard or approved equal

b. Model No.: 14CS

c. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following:

i. All panel s to have 12" free space between top of counter and bottom of sneeze guard.

ii. Install unit on or above hot food wells and cold units.

(iii) Milk Dispenser

a. Silver King

b. Model: SKMAJ 1 – 2 – 3

c. With Silver King 25791 Milk Crates w/ Lids2

(iv) Check Stand: Cambro (or approved equal)

(v) Soiled Dishtable

a. Manufacturer: Custom fabricated

b. Model No.: S/S c. Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details, and the following:

d. One T&SB -133 pre-rinse with B-109 wall bracket.

(vi) Disposer in Dish Table

a. Manufacturer: In-Sink Erator

b. Model No.: SS -200-6

1 Updated 10/05/2016 2 Added 10/02/2017

Page 59 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 8 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

c. Pertinent Data: 6" collar d. Utilities Required: 2 HP, 208V, 3PH, 1/2" CW, 2"W

e. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the following:

f. Install assembly in Soiled Dishtable.

i. Manual reverse switch. ii. Install "On" and "Off" switch where it CAN NOT be turned on accidentally.

Contact BVSD Plumbing Department for details.

(vii) Dish machine

a. Manufacturer: Hobart Model: AM 15 Tall b. Model No.: Coordinate with BVSD

c. Pertinent Data: High Temp

d. Utilities Required: Coordinate with BVSD e. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following:

i. Straight operation.

ii. Dishwasher electric heater preferred. Natural gas heater with BVSD

approval.

(viii) Booster Heater

a. Kitchen shall have dedicated hot water heater for kitchen use only—separate from school domestic hot water.

b. Booster Heater Manufacturer: Hatco or Hobart. c. Model No. C15 or larger where needed

d. Utilities Required: Electric preferred. Natural gas with BVSD approval.

e. Hose bib installed for draining booster heater.

f. Unions on inlet and outlet lines.

(ix) Condensate Hood

a. Manufacturer: Custom Fabricated

b. Model No.: Stainless Steel only

c. Pertinent Data: -

(x) Clean Dishtable

a. Manufacturer: Custom Fabricated

b. Stainless Steel only.

(xi) Wall Shelf

a. Manufacturer: Custom Fabricated

b. Stainless Steel only.

(xii) Tray Cart

a. Quantity: 2

b. Manufacturer: Cres-Cor (or equal) c. Model No.: 1408-6

d. Pertinent Data: Spring Handle

(xiii) Hand Sink

a. Install S/S sink (14 gauge minimum) with DWV copper trap (no plastic or cast

iron plumbing)

b. Chicago faucets, no substitution; See plumbing section.

Page 60 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 9 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(xiv) Soap and Towel Dispenser: Furnished by Owner

(xv) Pot and Pan Sink

a. Manufacturer: Custom Fabricated b. Stainless Steel only.

c. Utilities Required: Two 1/2" H&CW, three 1-1/2" IW

d. Fabricate and set in place as per plans, details, and the following:

i. Two Chicago faucets and three 1-1/2" lever waste drains.

ii. Size: 18” X 26”

(xvi) S/S Wall Cap

a. Stainless Steel only

(xvii) Storage Shelving

a. Quantity: 6 – 8 dependent upon kitchen size; verify with BVSD

b. Manufacturer: Metro c. Model No.: Super Electra Chrome-Plated Wire

d. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the following:

e. Length and configuration as per plan and verified room dimension.

f. Use "S" hooks for common post assemblies where possible.

(xviii) Fire Protection System

a. Manufacturer: Range Guard, Ansul or approved equal

i. Type: Ansul/Kidde

ii. Model No. R102

b. Model No.: Wet Chemical System

c. Pertinent Data: Automatic and Manual

d. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following:

i. Surface appliance nozzles, hood, and duct protection nozzles in exhaust hood, as required.

ii. Manual pull station and microswitches with 2 sets of normally open and 2

sets of normally closed contact points. iii. All exposed pipe and fittings shall be stainless steel.

iv. 6-month and 12-month inspections, serving, and replacement of

components as per NFPA 96, latest edition.

e. Supply one wall-mounted 40 BC rated fire extinguisher as part of this item.

(xix) Walk-In Cooler/Freezer

a. Quantity:

i. All Schools 1 each ii. Size dependent upon school’s Average Daily Participation. Verify with

BVSD.

b. Manufacturer: Bally or American Panel or approved equal

i. NSF, UL, and UL Classified Panels

c. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following:

Page 61 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 10 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

i. Unit to be installed in 4" deep building floor depression. See plan for size and configuration of compartments.

ii. Interior and exterior finish to be stucco embossed galvalume with 14- gauge galvanized floor

iii. Two 30" x 78" entrance doors; hinges as shown on plan.

d. Unheated pressure relief port in cooler compartment; heated in freezer compartment.

e. Audio-visual alarms required. f. 2 extra vapor-proof lights for field installation. 4 matching floor-to- finished-

ceiling trim strips; verify height and width. g. Matching closure panels on exposed front and to finish ceiling with louvered

access panels for adequate ventilation of top-mounted condensing units; verify

height. h. Freezer: air cooled, 208V, 3Ph, freezer compartment refrigeration system with

low-profile blower coil, pump- down cycle kit, quick connect wiring harness and wholly precharged quick connect refrigeration lines, drain line heater kit and

any accessories necessary for a completely installed and functional system for

a freezer box temperature of -10°F to -5°F. Condensing unit to be mounted to ensure best performance of unit.

i. Cooler: air cooled, 208V, 2Ph, cooler compartment refrigeration system with low-profile blower coil, pump- down cycle kit, quick-connect refrigeration lines,

and any accessories necessary for a completely installed and functional system for a cooler box temperature of +35°F to +40°F. Condensing unit to be

mounted to ensure best performance of unit.

j. Manufacturer shall furnish 10-year panel warranty for cooler and freezer

sections including parts FOB school and labor.

(xx) Pan Rack Cart

a. Quantity: 2

b. Manufacturer: Cres-Cor (or approved equal)

c. Model No.: 207-UA-13 d. Pertinent Data: Universal Angle

e. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following: Corner bumpers.

(xxi) Refrigerator Shelving

a. Quantity: 8 Section b. Manufacturer: Metro (or approved equal)

c. Model No.: Super Erecta Chrome-Plated Wire d. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following:

i. Length and configuration per plan and verified walk-in dimensions.

ii. Use "S" hooks for common post assemblies where possible.

(xxii) 30-Quart Mixer (only if specifically requested by BVSD)

a. Manufacturer: Hobart

b. Model No.: F30

c. Pertinent Data: Floor Model

(xxiii) 60-Quart Mixer (only if specifically requested by BVSD)

a. Manufacturer: Hobart b. Model No.: F60

Page 62 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 11 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

c. Pertinent Data: Floor Model

(xxiv) Double Convection Oven

a. Manufacturer: Blodgett b. Model No.: DFG- 100 excel

c. Pertinent Data: Two Compartment

d. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the following:

e. S/S front, left, and right sides. f. 6" S/S legs with castors

g. Flexible Gas Line

(xxv) Work Table: Stainless Steel only.

(xxvi) Exhaust Hood

a. Manufacturer: Molitron (or approved equal) b. Model No.: BFS-A-2-174-54

c. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following:

i. S/S construction.

ii. Recessed LED lights with lamps. iii. Provide S/S closure panels to finished ceiling.

iv. Make-up air to be introduced into the room through the front face of the hood.

v. Variable speed fan controlled by temperature sensor, with ability to run

manually at 100%3

(xxvii) 40-Gallon Kettle (only if specifically requested by BVSD)

a. Manufacturer: Cleveland or Groen b. Model No.: KDL-40-T

c. Pertinent Data: Tilting d. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following:

i. 2" tangent draw-off in lieu of 1-1/2".

ii. Interconnect to Convection Steamer.

(xxviii) Retherm Oven, Warming and Holding (only if specifically requested)

a. Manufacturer: FEW/Crescor

b. Model No. RH18

(xxix) Convection Steamer

a. Manufacturer: Cleveland

b. Model No.: 24 CGA 10.2 ES c. Include filter & descaler

d. Pertinent Data: Two Compartment e. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following: Provide Cleveland IMK interconnection kit.

(xxx) Prep Table

a. Manufacturer: Custom Fabricated

b. Model No.: S/S

3 Added 10/02/2017

Page 63 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 12 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

c. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the following:

d. Integral sink to have one T&S B-201 faucet and 1-1/2 rotary waste.

e. For Disposer information, see Disposer.

(xxxi) Heated Cart

a. Manufacturer: Cres-Cor b. Model No.: H-137-CDD-UA-12-HH

c. Pertinent Data: Universal Angle d. Utilities Required: 9 amp, 120V, 1Ph

e. Furnish and set in place as per manufacturer's standard specs and the

following:

i. Hasp lock, L-H.

ii. Two wheel locks.

(xxxii) Ingredient Bin (only if specifically requested)

a. Quantity: 3 b. Manufacturer: Rubbermaid

c. Model No.: 3628

d. Pertinent Data: Sliding Lid

(xxxiii) Slicer (only if specifically requested by BVSD)

a. Manufacturer: Hobart b. Model No.: 7512

c. Pertinent Data: 12" Blade

d. Utilities Required: 120V (xl)

(xxxiv) Salad Bar4

a. Manufacturer: Cambro Model No. 6FBR b. VBR6 - Standard Height - for use in K8, Middle and High schools

c. VBRL6 - Low Height - for use in Elementary School

(xxxv) Refrigerator – Reach – In & Freezers – 1 or 2 door

a. Manufacturer: Turbo Air

b. Model No. Pro 26 R or 50 R c. R134a or other refrigerants with Polyolester Oil that use a capillary tube as the

metering device are prohibited. POE is known to break down at high temperatures and generate metallic soap, sticky substances, or solids which

lead to capillary tube blockage causing catastrophic failures.

(xxxvi) Compressor Cooler

a. Manufacturer: Imperial Manufacture

b. Model No. MOH008X62CFT

(xxxvii) Flooring

a. The flooring must withstand heat. b. Linoleum prohibited.

c. Provide molded corners with 6” base for easy cleaning in all areas of the kitchen

Institutional Equipment 11 50 00

1. Educational and Scientific Equipment 11 50 00

4 Updated 10/02/2017

Page 64 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 13 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

2. Library Equipment 11 51 00 Furnished and installed by Owner

A. Audio-Visual Equipment 11 52 00

(i) Projection Screens: Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed (OFCI) (ii) 8’ wide manual screen typical at classrooms and instruction areas.

(iii) Power operation at high ceilings and large rooms. Coordinate size and location with

BVSD. (iv) Projectors: Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed (OFCI).

(v) Similar to Calypso System ezroom 200.(iii)

(vi) Learning Laboratories: No special requirements.

3. Laboratory Equipment 11 53 00

A. Laboratory Fume Hoods 11 53 13

B. Pre-wired and pre-piped.

C. Factory-finished sides, base and filler panels.

4. Kilns 11 95 1

A. Use electric Skutt kiln with enviro-vent as distributed by Mile Hi Ceramics.

5. Theater and Stage Equipment 11 61 00

A. APPLICATIONS/RESTRICTIONS

B. A. E.S.: Cyclorama C. B. M.S.: Proscenium Curtain and Cyclorama.

D. H.S.: Proscenium Curtain and Cyclorama. E. Acoustical Shells 11 61 13 – No special requirements.

F. Folding and Portable Stages 11 61 23 – No special requirements.

G. Rigging Systems and Controls 11 61 33 – No special requirements.

6. Stage Curtains 11 61 43

A. Furnished and installed by Contractor. B. 1. Pre-bagged.

C. 2. Pre-hung. D. Heavywieght fabric of woven cotton velour. Napped fabric of 100 percent cotton weighing

not less than 25 oz. per lineal yard. Similar to Memorable by KM Fabrics.

E. Architect to contact Fire Department for latest requirements. Fabricator to submit notarized affidavits concerning type of flame proofing.

F. Stage sound system: no special requirements

7. Athletic Equipment 11 66 00

A. Exercise Equipment 11 66 13

B. Gymnasium Equipment 11 66 23

(i) Volleyball standards and anchors.

(ii) Climbing ropes. (iii) Exterior basketball standards.

(iv) Gym divider curtains (v) Gym wall padding(safety pads)

(vi) Gym Basketball hoops and backboards

(vii) Gym Wall mounted chinning bar

(viii) CLIMBING ROPES

a. Secure to exposed metal joists above suspended ceiling provided under Section

05211.

C. EXTERIOR BASKETBALL STANDARDS

Page 65 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 14 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(i) Acceptable Manufacturers:

(ii) Coordinate with BVSD.

D. Gym Divider curtains–no special requirements E. Gym wall padding- Complete perimeter wall padding for middle and high schools: no

special requirements.

8. Interior Scoreboards 11 66 43

A. Manufactured by NEVCO or approved equal.

B. Cable: 75 ohm shielded coaxial. C. Plug/Socket: Physically different from that used with gymnasium public address system

to prohibit cross-connection. D. Controls: Remote from scoreboard preferred for servicing.

E. Control Panel: Single solid state microprocessor with capability for multiple-sports

(basketball, wrestling, volleyball): F. Multiple interchangeable and mechanical type controls are prohibited.

G. Battery back-up preferred. H. Locate at folding bleacher face plate.

I. 8'-0" (L) x 4'-0" (H) minimum size.

J. Rear and side service access panels prohibited.

K. Scoreboard receiver modules: Pluggable "black box" type units.

9. Back Stops

A. Main Court:

(i) Elementary: Glass backboard adjustable height, 8-10 feet.

a. Manually operated, forward folding.

B. Middle and High: Glass backboard, operable, 10 feet.

(i) Electrically operated with normally open manual key switch, forward folding.

C. Short Courts (2):

(i) Elementary: Glass backboard, adjustable height, 8-10 feet.

a. Manually operated, side folding.

(ii) Middle: Glass backboard, operable, 10 feet.

a. Manually operated, side folding.

(iii) High: Glass backboard, operable, 10 feet

a. Manually operated, side folding.

10. Gym Dividers 11 66 53: Power operated, drop type.

A. Gymnasium Equipment Inserts:

(i) Elementary: One volleyball court. (ii) Middle: Inserts for one main volleyball court + (2) short court volleyball courts.

(iii) High: Inserts for one main volleyball court + (2) short court volleyball courts.

B. Exercise Equipment: No special requirements.

C. Therapy Equipment: No special requirements.

11. Climbing Walls 11 67 33: See Project Manager

Page 66 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 15 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

Other Equipment

1. Solid Waste Handling Equipment 11 82 00: Coordinate the following with Director of

Operations, & Sustainability Coordinator

A. Solid Waste Bins 11 82 13

B. Recycling Equipment 11 82 23

C. Composting Equipment 11 82 29

FURNISHINGS

Fixed Furnishings

1. Window Blinds 12 21 00

A. Horizontal louver blinds shall be aluminum slat similar to Hunter Douglas-Flexalum or Levelor- Rivera.

B. Optical Light Shelf Daylighting System-no special requirements.

2. Window Shades 12 24 00

A. Roller shades to be made of fabric similar to Draper Inc.-Access Flexshades or

MechoShade Systems-Mecho/5.

3. Window Treatment Operating Hardware 12 25 00

A. Optical Light Shelf Daylighting System

4. Casework 12 30 00

A. Furnishings included in the General Contract for Construction are generally limited to

built-in type components (i.e. fixed seating would be included in the contract whereas folding chairs would be considered a furnishing to be purchased separately by the

Owner). Exception: Rolling shelf units are usually included with Manufactured casework subcontract.

B. Custom made cabinets may be considered if quality and cost are approximately equal to

pre-built cabinets. Verify with BVSD. C. (i) All cabinet drawers and doors (except sink base cabinets) in general office area,

nurse's area, and audio-visual storage areas in elementary schools should have locks. One cabinet drawer and teachers closet door in each elementary classroom shall be

locked. All cabinet drawers and doors (except sink base cabinets) in middle and senior

high schools should have locks. Verify keying with Owner, but in general all cabinets in any one room shall be keyed alike. Assemble all keys with keying schedule and turn over

to Owner's representative. D. Particular attention shall be given to detailing and hinges of large instrument and general

storage cabinets. Use continuous hinges where necessary to support weight of door

under heavy use. E. Specify five knuckle hinges or concealed hinges;

F. wire pulls with no points or edges.

G. Casework Acceptable Manufacturers:

(i) TMI Systems Design Corp. (ii) LSI Corp.

(iii) Westmark.

(iv) Colorado Custom Cabinets. (v) Sidney Millwork.

(vi) Stevens Cabinet Company. (vii) Kamtz Companies, Inc.

Page 67 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 16 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(viii) John Murphy.

(ix) BVSD Approved Substitute.

H. Plastic Laminate Acceptable Manufacturers:

(i) Wilsonart.

(ii) Formica

(iii) Nevamar (iv) Laminart

(v) Approved substitute

5. Specialty Casework 12 35 00

A. Educational/Library Casework 12 35 50- No special requirements B. Laboratory Casework 12 35 53

C. Epoxy resin countertops and drop-in sinks in science rooms and prep rooms.

D. 1” thick solid black epoxy resin with integral molded back and end splashes.

6. Display Casework 12 35 59 –No special requirements

A. Reception Casework –No special requirements

7. Countertops 12 36 00

A. Provide oak edging on laminate countertops.

8. Fixed Multiple Seating 12 60 00

A. Auditorium seating in high schools

B. Upholstery to meet strictest flame resistance and fire codes. C. provide 5 additional seat backs, 5 additional seat bottoms, additional extra set of

hardware for retracting seats, and 3 additional yards of each fabric color selected. D. Provide ADA seating Access and drop arms on end aisle seats.

E. Provide identification plates for each row and seat.

F. Acceptable manufacturers:

(i) Irwin Seating Company

(ii) Hussey Seating Company

(iii) Approved substitute.

9. Telescoping Stands 12 66 005

A. Hussey Seating: Maxam Telescopic Gym Seating or approved equal.

10. Fixed Seat and Table Assemblies 12 68 00 – No special requirements

11. Furniture 12 50 00

A. Office Furniture 12 51 00 by Owner

B. Institutional Furniture 12 56 00

(i) Classroom Furniture 12 56 33 by Owner

(ii) Library Furniture 12 56 51 by Owner

C. Audio-Visual Furniture 12 56 52 by Owner D. Laboratory Furniture 12 56 53 by Owner

E. Systems Furniture 12 59 00 by Owner

5 Updated 10/02/2017

Page 68 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

ELEMENT F: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION

SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – NO SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Integrated Construction

1. Fabric Structures 13 31 00 – All designs should meet or exceed current Colorado Front Range (Wind) Gust Map and Snow Load Design Data for Colorado, Map requirements.

2. Tensioned Fabric Structures 13 31 23 – Allowed for ECE shade structures.

3. Framed Fabric Structures 13 31 33 – Allowed for ECE shade structures. 4. Manufacturer-Engineered Structures 13 34 00

5. Exterior Grandstands and Bleachers 13 34 16 – All aluminum bleachers with clear anodized finish, manufacturer’s non-slip seat and footboards and guardrail systems. Meet all current

ADA requirements.

6. Metal Building Systems 13 34 19 – Allowed with owner approval.

Athletic and Recreational Special Construction

1. Safety Netting 13 28 16 - No special Owner requirements.

2. Floor Sockets 13 28 26

A. Provide 3 ½” round metal recessed floor inserts with covers for volleyball standards. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for floor type and substructure.

Coordinate number, location and type with owner and existing building equipment.

FACILITY REMEDIATION

Hazardous Materials Remediation

1. Asbestos Remediation 02 82 00 –Separate contract by Owner. Contractor shall review

building AHERA Plan and control all access by workers to ACM materials during construction.

2. Lead Remediation 02 83 00

A. Lead Hazard Control Activities 02 83 13 General Contractor responsible for any OSHA-

required lead hazard control to protect workers. B. Lead-Based Paint Remediation 02 83 19 by General Contractor per EPA requirements.

Pre-school areas identified by Owner.

3. Polychlorinate Biphenyl (PCB) Remediation 02 84 00

A. By General Contractor per EPA requirements.

4. Mold Remediation 02 85 00

A. By Owner. Project manager should be notified of any moisture introduced by

construction that might produce mold conditions.

DEMOLITION

Structure Demolition

1. Building Demolition 02 41 16.13

A. Building Demolition 02 41 16.13 - Contractor responsible for all special permits and

notifications. See ELEMENT: INTRODUCTION, Sustainable Design Requirements, for all

construction and demolition materials.

Selective Demolition 02 41 19

1. Selective Building Demolition 02 41 19.13

A. For retrofit carpet projects, remove and mark doors which will not clear new flooring.

(Trim and reinstallation by unit price.)

Page 69 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

B. Protect existing construction, finishes, mechanical and electrical systems, especially floor and wall finishes and roofing. See General Conditions Section 13.

C. All demolished electrical and mechanical fixtures and equipment to be returned to the District. All demolished copper piping and electrical wire to be salvaged and returned

to the District. All demolished door hardware to be salvaged and returned to the

District.

2. Selective Interior Demolition 02 41 19.16

A. See requirements for Selective Building Demolition.

3. Selective Historic Demolition 02 41 91

A. See requirements for Selective Building Demolition.

Structure Moving 02 43 00

1. Structure Relocation 02 43 13

A. By owner unless otherwise directed. Special permitting required.

Page 70 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 1 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

ELEMENT G: SITEWORK

SITE PREPARATION

Site Clearing

1. Tree and Shrub Removal and Trimming 31 13 00

2. Protect/relocate trees to remain in the finished construction.

Site Elements

1. Utility Demolition

A. Design Consultants are responsible for identification of existing District-owned

underground utilities on the appropriate drawings.

B. Coordinate with BVSD Maintenance Department for all in-district line locates.

2. Infrastructure Demolition

A. Where existing sites were used for residential purposes prior to acquisition by the School District, foundation structures may be encountered during excavation

operations. All such obstructions should be removed as required for the proper construction of this facility. The Architect should include sufficient information on the

drawings to indicate locations of previous construction.

Site Element Relocations

1. Utility Relocation

A. Design Consultant to assist Owner with utility relocation applications.

B. Relocations shall be at Owner’s expense.

Site Remediation 02 50 00

A. No requirements.

Site Earthwork 31 20 00

1. Grading 31 22 00

A. To the greatest extent possible, balance the cut and fill.

B. Stockpile topsoil. C. Export and dispose of debris, organic matter and contaminated soil.

D. All finish grades should be designed to provide positive drainage away from the

buildings and into approved drainage systems.

E. Finish Grading 31 22 19

(i) From outside face of building wall to a distance of 10 feet: 3% (minimum) (ii) Parking areas: 1% slope minimum; 3% maximum

(iii) Playground areas: 1% to 2% slope (iv) Lawn areas: 25% maximum. Owner prefers the least amount of slope for ease of

mowing.

2. Excavation and Fill 31 23 00

A. Fill 31 23 23: As recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Backfill 31 23 23.13: As recommended by Geotechnical Engineer. C. Compaction 31 23 23.23: As recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

D. Flowable Fill 31 23 23.3: Required by the City of Boulder at rights-of-way.

Page 71 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 2 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

3. Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 31 25 001

A. Any construction project that disturbs one acre or more will require a Stormwater

construction permit from the State of Colorado. A construction site Stormwater Management plan shall be included in the construction documents and will follow the

local jurisdiction regulations. The Architect and Contractor will prepare and document a

Site Construction Stormwater Management Plan for submittal to the State for an approved Stormwater Discharge Permit. Fees shall be paid by the Contractor. The

Owner will stop work and hold Contractor liable for violation of the Stormwater

Discharge Permit.

4. Soil Stabilization 31 32 00

A. Soil Mixing Stabilization 31 32 13

(i) Lime stabilization not allowed unless approved in writing by BVSD.

5. Rock Stabilization 31 33 00 No requirements 6. Soil Reinforcement 31 34 00 No requirements

7. Slope Protection 31 35 00 No requirements 8. Riprap 31 37 00: Consult with BVSD.

9. Site Soil Treatment 31 31 00

A. Vegetation Control 31 31 19

(i) At Roadways and Parking specify organic Soil Sterilant with minimum lateral

leaching properties.

SITE IMPROVEMENTS

Roadways

1. Roadway Pavement

A. Flexible Roadway Pavement 32 12 00

(i) As recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

(ii) Preferred except as otherwise noted

B. Rigid Roadway Pavement 32 13 00

(i) Provide at school bus traffic & bus parking areas

a. As recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

b. Width: 20'-0" minimum; 25' -0" preferred. c. Inside Turning Radius: 40' -0" minimum.

d. Outside Turning Radius: 60'-0" minimum.

e. Bus Length: 40'-0" average. f. Provide separate bus drive, entrance, and exit from street.

g. Provide pipe gate with padlock at bus entrance and exit.

(ii) Provide at trash pick-up areas/dumpster pads, including turn around zones.

(iii) Provide at service vehicle/loading dock areas.

(iv) Drain Pans: Concrete and 3' wide minimum. Concrete drain pans within asphalt

pavement are preferred.

C. Roadway Unit Pavement 32 14 00; Prohibited.

2. Roadway Curbs and Gutters 32 16 13

A. Prefabricated curbs Prohibited.

1 Changed 06/01/2016

Page 72 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 3 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

B. Hollywood curbs preferred.

3. Roadway Appurtenances 32 17 00

A. Speed Bumps 32 17 16: Consult with BVSD. Prevent drainage issues through design.

B. Pavement Snow Melting Systems 32 17 43: Prohibited.

4. Traffic Signage 10 14 53:

A. Aluminum traffic and pedestrian control signs shall be shown on the construction documents. Mount signs on perforated 2-1/2" square galvanized steel posts. Install

posts in sleeves set in concrete.

5. Pavement Markings 32 17 23: per CDOT specifications

Parking Lots

1. Parking Lots Performance Requirements 01 89 16

A. Automobile, truck, and bus traffic patterns shall be designed with student safety in

mind. B. Separate bus drop-off areas from parent drop-off areas.

C. All signs, signals and markings on school property shall conform to the "Uniform Traffic Control Device Manual," published by Colorado Department of Highways, Planning and

Research Division.

D. Islands should be kept to a minimum to facilitate snow removal. If present, islands must be contained with a Hollywood concrete curb.

E. At pedestrian walks, maintain 4'-0" minimum clearance beyond maximum vehicle overhang.

F. Inside Turning Radius: 15' -0" minimum. G. Conform to local Fire Department rules for provision of any paved or unpaved lanes for

fire truck access and for temporary fire lanes to be maintained during construction.

Include confirmation of fire hydrant locations along with other fire safety requirements. H. Design drainage to prevent water from collecting in traffic patterns. Drainage shall not

cross major pedestrian paths. I. Snow plow access required to all paved areas, including sidewalks

J. When designing new schools and sites, plan for access by all modes of transportation,

with preference for sustainable modes of transportation including biking, walking, carpooling and busing.

K. When redesigning existing sites, where reasonable, increase accessibility for sustainable modes of transportation including biking, walking, carpooling and busing.

L. During any project, where reasonable, add infrastructure to support electric vehicle

charging and bicycling.

2. Parking Lot Pavement 32 10 00

A. Flexible Parking Lot Pavement 32 12 00; preferred.

B. Rigid Parking Lot Pavement 32 13 00

(i) As recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

(ii) Aggregate: Free of ferrous material which could leach onto surface.

C. Parking Lot Unit Pavement 32 14 00; Prohibited.

D. Parking Lot Aggregate Surfacing 32 15 00: discouraged. With BVSD approval only.

3. Parking Lot Curbs and Gutters 32 16 13: asphalt curbs prohibited

A. Hollywood curbs are preferred to facilitate BVSD vehicle access

4. Parking Lot Appurtenances 32 17 00

Page 73 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 4 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

A. Parking Bumpers 32 17 13: Discouraged B. Pavement Snow Melting Systems 32 17 43: Prohibited.

C. Parking Lot Traffic Signage 10 14 53: Coordinate with BVSD

D. Parking Lot Pavement Markings 32 17 23

(i) Include painted striping designation of parking stalls, directional markings, and fire

lanes in the construction contract.

a. Handicapped: per ADAAG.

b. Standard: 9'-0" x 18' -0". c. Parallel to Curb: 9'-0" x 25'-0".

d. Drive aisle width (minimum for 90-degree configuration): 26'-0".

5. Parking Lot Lighting 26 56 16

A. Illumination: Perimeter lighting configuration is preferred over island type. Provide 36"

high minimum concrete base to protect light poles from traffic.

B. Horizontal Illuminance

(i) .8 average (ii) .2 minimum

(iii) 4/1 uniformity ration

C. LED luminaires preferred

D. Dark Sky compliant

Pedestrian Plazas and Walkways

1. Pedestrian Pavement 32 10 00

A. Flexible Pedestrian Pavement 32 12 00: with Owner approval.

B. Rigid Pedestrian Pavement 32 13 00: Preferred.

(i) Provide access to all paved areas for sweepers and snow removal equipment

(ii) 8’-0” minimum wide to allow snow removal via pickup truck. (iii) Specify epoxy-coated rebar for areas expected to receive salt for de-icing (stairs,

ramps, landings, etc.).

(iv) Flatwork Reinforcing:

a. Fibrous reinforcement admixture acceptable.

b. 6 x 6 – W 1.4 x 1.4 galvanized or stainless steel welded wire fabric acceptable.

c. Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: Required for exterior flatwork.

(v) Aggregate: Free of ferrous material which could leach onto surface.

(vi) As recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

(vii) Medium broom texture perpendicular to main traffic flow.

C. Pedestrian Unit Pavement 32 14 00

(i) Limit use; subject to Owner’s written approval.

D. Pedestrian Aggregate Surfacing 32 15 00

(i) Soil sterilant required (ii) Provide weed barrier fabric

(iii) Stabilized crusher fines preferred.

2. Exterior Steps and Ramps: keep to minimum

3. Pedestrian Pavement Appurtenances 32 17 00

A. Tactile Warning Surfacing 32 17 26: Per ADA requirements

Page 74 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 5 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

B. Pavement Snow Melting Systems 32 17 43; Highly discouraged. With written Owner

approval only.

4. Plaza and Walkway Lighting 26 56 33

A. Horizontal Illuminance

(i) .8 average

(ii) .2 minimum (iii) 4/1 uniformity ration

(iv) LED luminaires preferred

Athletic, Recreational, and Playfield Areas

1. Athletic Areas

A. Athletic Areas Performance Requirements 01 89 16

(i) Lighting Levels 01 89 16: Confirm with Owner

B. Athletic Surfaces 32 18 00

(i) Baseball Field Surfacing 32 18 23.13

a. Natural grass

b. Stabilized infield mix

(ii) Running Track Surfacing 32 18 23.33

a. Middle Schools: Asphalt

b. High Schools: Polyurethane

(iii) Tennis Court Surfacing 32 18 23.53

a. Sub-surface development for new tennis courts is critical for maintenance of a

quality playing surface. The design shall include careful analysis and preparation of the sub-grade; post-tensioned concrete courts are preferred.

Coordinate positive site drainage away from courts in all directions. Post-pour

leveling is prohibited.

C. Athletic Court Fencing

(i) Tennis Court Fences and Gates 32 31 13.26 no requirements

(ii) Tennis Court Wind Breaker 32 31 13.29 no requirements

D. Athletic Equipment

(i) Exterior Athletic Equipment 11 68 23

a. Basketball Backstops: Porter Model 00164, with Model 00234 goal on painted

aluminum fan bank or approved equal.

i. Rim at 8’-0” for elementary schools.

ii. Rim at 10’-0” at middle and high schools.

b. Aluminum bleachers shall have a clear anodized finish with manufacturers’ standard aluminum non-slip seat and footboards. Consult BVSD for bleacher

seating capacity. Permanently anchor to ground.

(ii) Exterior Scoreboards 11 68 43

a. Provide at High Schools; coordinate with Owner. b. LED type.

c. Wireless controls.

Page 75 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 6 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

2. Playfield Areas

A. Playfield Surfacing

(i) Synthetic Resilient Surfacing 32 18 16

a. Engineered Wood Fiber preferred at playground equipment. Drains are

required.

b. Pea gravel only with approval of Owner.

B. Playfield Equipment and Structures 11 68 00

(i) Playground Equipment 11 68 13

a. Playground equipment shall be included in the construction contract. Consult

BVSD for layout. b. Equipment must be installed by a certified installer.

c. ADA access required.

d. Avoid steep slopes, open drainage swales and retaining walls. e. Exclude motorized vehicles from all playground areas. Provide protected

access ways at normal lines of pedestrian traffic. f. In paved playground areas requiring installation of tetherball posts or any

other posts, require that paving be completed before poles are installed.

Provide steel sleeve in concrete that are level with adjacent surface. g. The site should be developed so that student traffic does not cross or go

through service traffic lanes.

(ii) Play Structures 11 68 16: Coordinate equipment layout with Owner.

Site Development

1. Fences and Gates 32 31 00

A. Chain Link Fences 32 31 13: Preferred

(i) Specifications

a. All fence materials shall be steel, galvanized by the hot dip process.

b. All posts shall be Schedule 40 pipe. c. Fabric: 9 gauge wire, 2" mesh, knuckled top and bottom. Furnish one piece

fabric width for fencing up to 12' high. Place fabric on outside of line posts.

d. Line Posts: 1 1/2" nom. (1.9" O.D.) space at 10' O.C. unless shown otherwise. e. Terminal Posts: 2" nom. (2.375" O.D.) for end, corner and pull posts.

f. Gate Posts: 2 1/2" nom. (2.875" O.D.) for single gate. 3" nom. (3.5" O.D.) for double gates. Top Rail: 1 1/4' nom. (1.66" O.D.) manufacturer's longest

lengths, with 6" long expansion type couplings at each joint. Provide means

to securely attach top rail to each post, such as welding. g. Center Rail: 1 1/4" nom. (1.66" O.D.) locate between each terminal post

(end, corner and gate) and the nearest line post. Attach securely to each post.

h. Truss Rods: 3/8" dia. rod with anchor and turnbuckle fittings. Install diagonally from top of all terminal posts to bottom of nearest line post and

diagonally each way in all gates.

i. Tension Bars: Minimum cross section 1/4" x 1/4," one piece lengths equal to fabric height.

j. Tension Clamps: 14 gauge x 1' spaced at 15" O.C. maximum. k. Tension Wire: 9 gauge wire. Install entire length at bottom edge and 2' above

bottom edge of fabric. Wire to be continuous between terminal posts.

Page 76 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 7 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

l. Fence Fasteners: 12 gauge wire. Space 12" O.C. on line posts and 24" O.C. on rails and braces.

m. Post Tops: Weather tight closure cap with opening for top rail, one cap for

each post.

(ii) Standard Boundary Fence Height: 8'-0".

(iii) Set property line fence post centerline 6 inches inside property line. (iv) Mow strip: 12" wide concrete, continuous along fence.

(v) Gas Meter Enclosure: Provide a fenced enclosure with gate and top around the gas meter; coordinate with Xcel Energy.

(vi) Provide 48” high fence around playground structure area. If on property line, provide 8’-0” fence. Provide 10’-0” wide gate to allow for district maintenance

vehicle access.

B. Gates 32 31 13

(i) Frames: 1 1/2" nom. (1.9" O.D.) for all perimeter members and intermediate

members if perimeters are over 8' apart. Frames shall be welded and joints painted with zinc based paint.

(ii) Fabric: 9 gauge wire, 2" mesh, knuckled top and bottom, attached to frame with

tension bars and clamps same as for fence. (iii) Hinges: Malleable iron, non-lift-off type, 180° swing, one pair for each gate to 6'

height. Provide 1 1/2 pair for gates over 6' height. (iv) Latches: Fork type for single gate, plunger-bar for double gates. Operation either

side, integral padlock eye, plunger-bar strike set in concrete. To facilitate snow removal, where possible set fence line 8'-0" (minimum) away from vehicle

pavement.

C. Alternate types of fencing in lieu of chain link fencing may be considered, particularly at the elementary level, in order to satisfy local and unique conditions. Alternate types of

fencing must be carefully evaluated to assure long-term durability, low maintenance, ease of maintenance, proper control and comparable cost to chain link fence. Alternate

fences not meeting this criterion may be installed if adjacent property Owners agree to

maintain the fence and participate in excess costs of installing the al ternate fence type.

(i) Welded Wire Fences and Gates 32 31 16: With BVSD approval

(ii) Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 32 31 19: Prohibited. (iii) Plastic Fences and Gates 32 31 23: Prohibited

(iv) Wire Fences and Gates 32 31 26: Prohibited

(v) Wood Fences and Gates 32 31 29: With BVSD approval

(vi) Snow fence: prohibited

2. Site Furnishings 12 93 00

A. Bicycle Racks 12 93 13

(i) Provide an area for bicycle parking that is accessible, conveniently located, and noticeable.

(ii) Fence enclosure: verify with Owner.

(iii) Inverted U bicycle racks with black powder coated finish preferred. Bolt to concrete slab.

(iv) Minimum quantity: 12% of school’s student capacity. (v) Locate as close to main entrance as feasible.

(vi) Visitor/staff bicycle parking separate from student parking is desirable.

(vii) Sheltered parking is desirable.

(viii) Locate in view of windows within the building for increased security.

B. Trash and Litter Receptors 12 93 23

Page 77 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 8 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

(i) Coordinate with Owner. (ii) Snow dome tops required.

(iii) Must be bear-proof type west of Broadway.

C. Planters 12 93 33: discouraged.

D. Site Seating and Tables 12 93 43

(i) Vinyl-coated expanded metal type preferred

(ii) Embed in concrete

3. Flagpoles 10 75 00

A. Aluminum, tapered with internal halyard.

4. Retaining Walls 32 32 00 Use is discouraged. Where retaining walls are necessary, they

should be held to a minimum height.

A. Cast-In-Place Concrete Retaining Walls 32 32 13; Preferred type if required.

B. Precast Concrete Retaining Walls 32 32 16; With Owner Approval. C. Unit Masonry Retaining Walls 32 32 19; With Owner Approval.

D. Segmental Retaining Walls 32 32 23; With Owner Approval. E. Metal Crib Retaining Walls 32 32 26; Prohibited

F. Timber Retaining Walls 32 32 29; Prohibited.

G. Reinforced Soil Retaining Walls 32 32 34; Prohibited H. Gabion Retaining Walls 32 32 36; Prohibited.

I. Soldier-Beam Retaining Walls 32 32 43; Prohibited.

J. Stone Retaining Walls 32 32 53; With Owner Approval.

5. Site Bridges 32 34 00: Discouraged. With BVSD approval only.

6. Site Screening Devices 32 35 00

A. Include visual screening of the delivery, transformer, meters, and trash dumpster

areas. Consult BVSD for height.

7. Site Specialties 32 39 00

A. Metal Bollards 32 39 13

(i) Provide at building corners with proximity to vehicle access.

(ii) Concrete-filled, 8” schedule 40 steel preferred.

Exterior Signage2

1. Building Signage

A. Signage should be provided so that the name of the school and district brand are

visible from a vehicle from the street.

(i) Provide exterior free-standing (monument) signage in the contract for new

buildings. Electronic signs must have wireless controls. Coordinate with Owner. (ii) Provide cast aluminum letter signage including address on new buildings; letters

shall be large enough to be read from a vehicle on the street. The sign should include the full name of the school, e.g. Bear Creek Elementary School, not Bear

Creek, not Bear Creek Elementary.

B. The BVSD brand logo shall appear along with the school name on either the free-

standing sign or the signage on the building. The brand logo shall be clearly visible

from the street. It is preferred that the horizontal treatment of the brand logo be used. The width of the entire brand logo on the building should be approximately 1.5 times

2 Added 10/02/2017

Page 78 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 9 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

the word ‘school’ in the signage for the school’s name. The width of the stacked logo, if it is used, should be approximately half the width of the word ‘school.’

C. These specifications also apply in the case of an entrance remodel, where the existing name signage will be demolished and replaced. The logo should be in the same

material as the school name if possible.

D. Examples of BVSD brand signage and the brand logo are included at the following links. Examples of other versions of the logo also are included, however, the horizontal logo

is preferred. Final design of building signage must be approved by owner.

(i) link to a Dropbox folder with photos of examples

(ii) link to a document that shows the horizontal logo scaled (iii) Link to graphic file of horizontal logo for designer to use (.eps)

(iv) Link to graphic file of stacked logo for designer to use (.eps)

Landscaping

1. General

A. Absolute minimal maintenance must be the design objective for any landscaping! B. Lawn areas should have a minimum 4" topsoil installed and should be fine graded to

finish elevations.

C. Specify that the site soil be tested and amended as required. D. Avoid berm slopes which make rider-driven machine mowing difficult.

E. Provide a 3' wide concrete apron adjacent to the outside wall of the buildings wherever

lawn or planting areas occur.

2. Planting Irrigation 32 84

A. Irrigation Pumps 32 82 00

(i) Precision Pumping Systems; no substitutions. Coordinate with BVSD.

B. Drip Irrigation 32 84 13

(i) Extended length pop-up types preferred over drip irrigation.

C. Sprinkler Systems 32 84 23

3. Turf and Grasses 32 92 00

A. Hydro-Mulching 32 92 13; permitted in non-irrigated areas

(i) At high use areas: Prohibited at non- irrigated areas (ii) At low use areas: Provide low maintenance, low growing native grass mixes.

Consult with the Colorado State University Extension Service.

B. Plugging 32 92 16; not recommended.

C. Seeding 32 92 19; permitted with owner approval

(i) At high use areas: Consult with the Colorado State University Extension Service for

bluegrass cultivar mixes that require less water than traditional bluegrass cultivars.

D. Sodding 32 92 23; Preferred over seeding.

(i) At high use areas: Consult with the Colorado State University Extension Service for

bluegrass cultivar mixes that require less water than traditional bluegrass cultivars.

E. Plants 32 93 00; Plants shall be selected for minimal maintenance and shall not require

the use of pesticides and herbicides. Do not specify plants that have thorns, bear fruit

that attracts bees and insects or break easily.

F. Ground Covers 32 93 13

(i) Junipers, fitzers, prohibited.

Page 79 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 10 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

G. Plants and Bulbs 32 93 23 H. Shrubs 32 93 33: thorny shrubs prohibited.

I. Trees 32 93 43; Do not specify silver maple, Siberian/Chinese elm, cottonwood, willow, white ash, green ash, Russian olive, crabapple, honey locust, or spruce. Do not specify

plants that have thorns, bear fruit that attracts bees and insects or break easily.

J. Planting Accessories 32 94 00

(i) Landscape Edging 32 94 13

a. Metal with rolled edge and integral anchors permitted only.

(ii) Landscape Timbers 32 94 16; Wood type prohibited.

(iii) Planters 32 94 33; discouraged (iv) Tree Grates 32 94 43: Use only if trees are located in pavement area.

(v) Decorative Landscape Boulders: no requirements

(vi) Vertical Planting Nets and Grids: with Owner approval.

(vii) Stone Cobble: Rocks must be grouted to prevent removal

K. Landscape Lighting 26 56 26: discouraged.

LIQUID AND GAS SITE UTILITIES 1. For new construction projects provide and cap water, gas, electric, data, communications,

and sewer utilities to 5 feet outside the face of the building to allow for connection of future temporary classrooms. The facility’s master plan shall consider location for such temporary

classrooms (24' x 60' typical size). For schools that are not built to ultimate capacity in the

initial phase, size the utilities to allow for ultimate capacity. Provide for enclosures at meters, transformers, and remote readers, as required by utility company. Coordinate with

BVSD for vaults, locations and contents.

Water Utilities

1. Site Domestic Water Distribution

A. Water Utility Service: Reduced pressure assembly backflow preventer required.

(i) For new service taps, use the smallest tap possible as the size effects ongoing

monthly fees.

B. Water Supply Wells 33 21 00 Prohibited

2. Site Irrigation Water Distribution

A. Water Utility Service

B. For new service taps, use the smallest tap possible as the size effects ongoing monthly

fees. Provide separate irrigation tapIrrigation Water Wells 33 21 16: prohibited

C. Water Distribution Piping 33 11 00

(i) Settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during warranty period shall be repaired at no expense to Owner, including complete restoration of damaged

property.

(ii) Trenching

a. Uniform and straight.

b. 24" (min.) 36" (max.) ground cover to top of pipe for mainline; bed pipes in granular mater. 16" for rotary heads; 12" minimum over lateral lines for spray

heads; 12” minimum over control wires and from controllers to valves.

c. Trenches shall be made wide enough to allow a minimum of 6 inches between parallel pipe lines.

d. Match original density and grade. Crown for future settlement if original

density cannot be achieved.

Page 80 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 11 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

i. After system is operating and required tests and BVSD Maintenance inspections have occurred, backfill excavations and trenches with clean

soil, free of rubbish and rock. ii. Compact trenches in areas to be planted by thoroughly flooding the

backfill. Jetting process may be used in those areas.

(iii) Setting: Uniform firm bearing for the entire length of line. Wedging or blocking is prohibited.

(iv) Thrust Blocking: Required. Approved configurations available from BVSD.

(v) Sleeves

a. Required at all pavement irrigation lines under pavement. b. Use at least 2 nominal pipe sizes larger than irrigation pipe and extends 12"

beyond pavement or concrete.

c. PVC Class 160 or galvanized heavy wall steel conduit.

d. Wiring to be sleeved separately under all pavement or concrete.

D. Water Distribution Equipment 33 12 00

(i) Main Line Fittings: PVC Schedule 40 molded; solvent weld type up to 4”", gasketed

fittings for larger than 4”

(ii) Copper Pipe: Required between meter and backflow preventer, and from backflow preventer to below ground at drain, Type K . Also required with any booster pump

installation.

(iii) Branch Line Pipe (Intermittent Pressure):

a. PVC: normal impact class schedule 40 min Schedule 80 may be required where determined by owner

b. Polyethylene: prohibited.

(iv) Branch Line Joints: Suitable for solvent weld. (v) Branch Line Fittings: PVC: compatible with schedule 40

(vi) Solvent and Glue: Per pipe manufacturer. No substitutions.

(vii) Risers

a. Rotary Head or Quick-Coupler Valve: PVC schedule 80 nipple adjustable

double swing joint riser. b. Lawn Spray Head: Same as above. No "cutoff" nipples or plastic fittings shall

be used. c. Pipe shall be cut in a standard pipe cutting tool with sharp cutters. Ream

only to full diameter of pipe and clean all rough edges or burrs. Cut all

threads accurately with sharp dies. d. Set to precise elevations 1-1/2" above finish grade and 1" above sodded

areas, 1/4" below and 6" away from adjacent pavement and 12" away from building. Set swing joint angles between 20° and 45°.

e. Sprinkler Heads. Radius 45' to 67': The full and/or part circle sprinklers shall be gear driven rotary, in-ground type and designed with an integral check

valve for control of line drainage. Water distribution shall be via two (2)

nozzles mounted in a 1 1/2" diameter stainless steel nozzle turret. f. Sprinkler Heads. Radius 4' to 15': The sprinkler shall be of the fixed spray

type designed for in-ground installation.

i. The sprinkler as designated shall be manufactured by Rainbird, Hunter,

or approved equal.

ii. Do not mix head types within a zone.

g. Shrub Bubblers

Page 81 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 12 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

i. Prohibited. Use extended pop-up sprayers.

(viii) Wiring: Type UF with 4/64" U L-listed insulation for underground burial for class II

circuits.

a. New Irrigation systems:

i. BVSD is very interested in pursuing a two-wire decoder system in lieu of

wire for each zone.

b. Existing Irrigation Systems

i. Solenoid: Single color coded 14 gauge wire to each solenoid. ii. Common: White coded wire; 14 gauge permitted for runs up to 1000

lineal feet. iii. Connections: Locate at valve boxes; use DBR or DBY connectors. Buried

splices prohibited.

iv. Control wire splices will be allowed only in runs more than 500 feet. v. All wire passing under existing or future paving, construction, etc., shall

be encased in plastic conduit extending at least 12" beyond edges of paving or construction.

vi. Run adjacent to pipe in same trench. Run at least one additional wire

along main line for each 8 automatic valves in the system. Identify additional wires on "as-built" documents.

vii. Install control wires at least 18" below finish grade and lay to the side and below main line.

viii. Provide looped slack at valves and snake wires in trench to allow for contraction of wires.

ix. Tie wires in bundles at 10' intervals.

(ix) Gate Valves: Cast iron or bronze; rated 150psi (minimum); waterway equal to full nominal diameter of valve; open counterclockwise; square nut activated at

sleeves; wheel handle activated at manhole or open areas. (x) Drain and Semi-Automatic Valves: Bronze, angle type, 200 lb. Class with cross-

type operating handles.

(xi) Quick-Coupler Valves:

a. Use not allowed except in native grass landscape areas.

b. At end of line if system not looped or at lowest point of loop. c. After backflow

d. Two at ballfields: near first and third bases.

e. 2-piece 150psi rated cast brass with locking rubber lid.

(xii) Automatic Control Valves: Cast brass body and bonnet globe-type; normally

closed, integrally-molded, single-seat, diaphragm-operated, 2-way 24-volt solenoid activated with manual bleed plug and flow adjustment. Atmosphere-vented and 3-

way solenoid valves are prohibited. (xiii) Remote Control Valves: The automatic remote control valve shall be a globe

pattern electrically activated, 150 psi rated. Cycolac and glass filled nylon plastic

construction. Diaphragm shall be of polyurethane material. Solenoid shall be 3.5 watt, 24 volt A.C. with waterproof-molded coil capable of being removed from the

valve with turning coil and twisting wire. Valve shall be equipped with a hand operated flow control stem, a manual bleed plug, and all internal parts shall be

serviceable from top of valve without removing the body from the line. Pressure

loss at 30 GPM shall not exceed 7.0 psi.

a. Install isolation ball valve before each control valve

Page 82 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 13 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

i. Brass or schedule 80 acceptable.

(xiv) Sprinkler Heads:

a. Large Turf Areas:

i. Hunter I-20s, I-25s and I-40s

ii. Rainbird 6504

b. Small Turf Areas:

i. Rainbird 1800 series, 4".

c. Ornamental Areas:

i. Rainbird 1800 series

d. Protective rubber covers required at all areas except ornamental landscape.

(xv) Automatic Controller: RainMaster Evolution DX2. Provide 6 extra zones in existing

controllers.

a. Locate controller on exterior wall in stainless steel vandal-proof enclosure or within the grounds storage room or building with view toward irrigated areas

to the greatest extent possible. b. Locate rain gauge to prevent vandalism.

c. Connect remote control valves to controller in a clockwise sequence to

correspond with station setting beginning with Stations 1, 2, 3, etc.

(xvi) Backflow Preventer: Febco, no substitutions

a. Above-Ground:

i. Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker: Not permitted.

ii. Reduced Pressure Principle Vacuum Breaker: Locate in heated, secure structure, installed per manufacturer’s specifications and applicable

codes.

iii. Provide secure lockable metal cage enclosure

iv. Provide heat for enclosure at high school level.

b. Below Ground: Not permitted.

(xvii) For work at existing sites, test and document irrigation system performance with

BVSD personnel present before work begins.. This is required.

(xviii) Service Saddles: No saddles permitted.

(xix) Specify the following extra materials for Owner’s stock

a. One head of each type b. Controller keys, valve keys, quick coupler keys.

c. Hose swivels for quick couplers

(xx) Water Service Connections 33 12 13

a. Size water service with smallest tap to provide required water flow.

b. Water Distribution Valves 33 12 16Space valves in manifolds to allow access for repairs. 24" minimum separation.

c. Main line shall be graded to drain without using a pressure system to blow out lines if automatic drain valves are utilized. Coordinate with Owner for use

and layout of automatic drain valves.

d. Automatic drain valves should be used where lateral line will not drain back to main line.

e. Drain valves shall be accessible without digging.

Page 83 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 14 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

f. Control valves shall be grouped in one location where possible and installed in-valve boxes for protection and access; place no closer than 12 inches to

walk edges, buildings, and walls. g. In-line anti-siphon check valves shall be installed where needed to prevent

drain down of large portion of the system to a single point.

h. Isolation valves: Required to permit maintenance without complete shutdown of system.

i. Remote Control Valves: Separate valve box required for each valve. j. Drain Valves: Locate in valve boxes or in sleeves with plastic or rubber locking

caps. Place 1 cubic foot (minimum) gravel sump below each valve.

k. Locate drain valves at system low points

(xxi) Valve Boxes: Inconspicuous locations only, away from playfields, drive areas, and

activity areas. Provide vertical separation to prevent contact with mainline. 10" or 12" bright color polyiron with locking cover and extensions to adjust to grade level.

Provide purple valve boxes and caps if using raw water.

(xxii) Water Pumping Stations 33 12 23

a. Pumps (AS REQUIRED): Centrifugal type activated by flow switch or controller

relay. Precision Pumping Systems or other approved by BVSD.

(xxiii) Water Metering 33 12 33 testing required as part of acceptance

E. Water Storage Tanks 33 16 00 no owner requirements

F. Water Ponds and Reservoirs 33 47 19

(i) Enclose with 8’ chainlink fence (ii) Raw water or grey water preferred for irrigation; coordinate with BVSD

(iii) Water Pond and Reservoir Liners 33 47 13

(iv) Water Pond and Reservoir Covers 33 47 16

G. Contractor requirements

(i) Contractor shall be responsible for draining of the irrigation system at the close of the first sprinkling season and for start-up of the system the following spring

without being requested by the Owner. Contractor shall use compressed air or an

acceptable equivalent to drain the system. Use procedures that are industry standards. Contractor shall adjust system (sprinkler heads, coverage, etc.) as part

of the start-up procedures. Owner shall be notified before draining or the reactivating of the irrigation system by the Contractor.

(ii) Blow out and initial startup, winterization and spring start up (when Contractor

deems necessary to maintain plant material and prevent frost damage to system) are required for work in this section.

(iii) Demonstration/walk-through with BVSD personnel required before acceptance.

Sanitary Sewerage Utilities

1. Sanitary Sewerage Utility Connection

A. Conform to requirements of water/sewer agency having jurisdiction.

B. Provide the following Traps/filters

(i) Grease Traps: Kitchens. (ii) Sand Oil Traps: Vehicle Shops.

(iii) Acid Neutralization: Science laboratories, photo labs, and art facilities.

(iv) Solids Interceptor: Art facilities.

2. Utility Septic Tanks 33 36 00: Prohibited.

3. Sanitary Sewerage Structures 33 39 00

Page 84 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 15 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

A. Sewerage Manholes, Frames, and Covers 33 39 13

(i) Precast concrete eccentric cone; 36" minimum height with cast-in aluminum ladder

rungs (not rebar) at 16" o.c (ii) Provide precast concrete manholes at 300' maximum intervals and at all pipe

junctions of 6" or larger.

B. Sewerage Cleanouts 33 39 23

Storm Drainage Utilities

1. Storm Drainage Utility Connection

2. Storm Drainage Piping 33 41 00

A. Review drainage study with local jurisdiction. B. Protect inlet and outflow with tamper resistant grate to prevent passage of objects

larger than four inches.

C. Whenever possible, roof drains should be conducted through concealed pipes to the city storm sewer system. If a storm sewer is not available, consult with the

jurisdiction's wastewater management division for acceptable methods of surface drainage.

D. Rodent Control: Required at site drainage outlets.

3. Culverts 33 42 00: no requirements

A. Pipe Culverts 33 42 13

B. Concrete Culverts 33 42 16

4. Site Storm Water Drains 33 44 00: no requirements

A. Area Drains 33 44 13 B. Trench Drains 33 44 16

C. Storm Water Treatment 33 44 19

5. Storm Drainage Pumps 33 45 00: Prohibited

6. Site Subdrainage 33 46 00

A. Subdrainage Piping 33 46 16 B. Drainage Layers 33 46 23

C. Geotextile Subsurface Drainage Filtration 33 46 26

7. Storm Drainage Ponds and Reservoirs 33 47 26: Perimeter fencing is required.

Site Energy Distribution

Site Fuel Distribution

1. Site Gas Distribution 33 41 00: Coordinate with BVSD and XCEL Energy

Liquid and Gas Site Utilities Supplementary Components

ELECTRICAL SITE IMPROVEMENTS

Site Electric Distribution Systems

1. Electrical Utility Services 33 71 73

2. Electric Transmission and Distribution 33 71 00.

A. Electrical Utility Towers 33 71 13

B. Electrical Utility Poles 33 71 16 C. Underground Ducts and Manholes 33 71 19

D. Insulators and Fittings 33 71 23

E. Transmission and Distribution Equipment 33 71 26 F. Wiring 33 71 39

Page 85 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design 16 Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

G. Direct Current Transmission 33 71 53

H. Transmission and Distribution Specialties 33 71 83

3. Electrical Substations 33 72 00 4. Electrical Transformers 33 73 00

5. Electrical Switchgear and Protection Devices 33 75 00

A. Circuit Breakers B. Fusible Interrupter Switchgear 33 77 26

C. Cutouts 33 77 33 D. Fuses

E. Surge Arresters F. Shunt Arresters

G. Reclosers 33 77 53

6. Site Grounding 33 79 00

Site Lighting 26 56 29

1. Building Illumination: prohibited

SITE COMMUNICATIONS

Site Communications Systems

1. Site Communications Structures 33 81 00: Coordinate the following with BVSD Information

Technology Department (IT)

A. Communications Transmission Towers 33 81 13

B. Antenna Towers 33 81 16 C. Communications Utility Poles 33 81 19

D. Aerial Cable Installation Hardware 33 81 23 E. Communications Underground Ducts, Manholes, and Hand holes

F. Communications Vaults, Pedestal, and Enclosures: Precast concrete preferred.

G. Communications Blowers, Fans, and Ventilation

2. Site Communications Distribution 33 82

A. Optical Fiber Communications Distribution 33 82 23: Coordinate with BVSD IT

Site Electronic Safety and Security Systems

Page 86 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

APPENDIX

Page 87 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

SECTION 01 91 00 – COMMISSIONING

Part 1: General

1.01 Summary

A.THIS SECTION IS WRITTEN FOR LARGER PROJECTS AND NEW BUILDINGS. THE INTENT IS

CLEAR FOR ALL BVSD PROJECTS. HOWEVER, THE REQUIREMENTS HEREIN MAY BE ALTERED

TO FIT THE INDIVIDUAL PROJECT IT IS TO BE USED ON.

B. Commissioning is a comprehensive and systematic process to verify that the building systems

perform as designed to meet the owner’s requirements. Commissioning during the

construction, acceptance, and warranty phases is intended to achieve the following specific objectives: Verify and document that equipment is installed and started per manufacturer’s

recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards.

1. Verify and document that equipment and systems receive complete operational checkout by installing contractors.

2. Verify and document equipment and system performance. 3. Verify the completeness of operations and maintenance materials.

4. Ensure that the owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained on the operation

and maintenance of building equipment. i. The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the

responsibility of the system designers or installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product.

ii. The Commissioning Authority is hired by and under contract with the owner. The general contractor that is awarded the project shall not

include the cost of the Commissioning Authority in their price. The

general contractor (and their subcontractors) shall include cost for their involvement in the commissioning process including demonstration of

installed equipment to the commissioning team members during the acceptance portion of the project, and other responsibilities as described

in the specification.

1.02 Related Sections

1.03 Definitions

A. Commissioning Team. Commissioning Authority (CA), the Owner’s Representative (PM), the

General Contractor (GC or Contractor), the architect and design engineers (A/E), the

Mechanical Contractor (MC), the Electrical Contractor (EC), the TAB representative (TAB), the Controls Contractor (CC), the owner’s maintenance staff, and any other installing

subcontractors or suppliers of equipment.

B. The responsibilities of various parties in the commissioning process are provided in this section. The responsibilities of the mechanical contractor, TAB and controls contractor and

those of the electrical contractor are in their respective divisions. The services for the Commissioning Authority are not provided for in the General Contract. That is, the Contractor

is not responsible for providing their services. Their responsibilities are listed here to clarify

the commissioning process.1

1. All Parties attend commissioning scoping meeting and additional coordination meetings, as necessary.

2. Architect (A/E)

1 Revised 01/27/2017

Page 88 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

i. Construction and Acceptance Phase a. Attend the commissioning scoping meeting and selected

commissioning team meetings. b. Provide design narrative documentation requested by the CA.

c. Coordinate resolution of system deficiencies identified during

commissioning, according to the contract documents. 3. Mechanical and Electrical Designers/Engineers (A/E)

i. Construction and Acceptance Phase a. Provide design narrative and sequences documentation requested

by the CA. b. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and other selected

commissioning team meetings.

c. Participate in the resolution of system deficiencies identified during commissioning, according to the contract documents.

d. Optional: Review the equipment start‐up and pre‐functional

checklists. Review the functional performance test plans. Witness performance testing

4. Commissioning Authority (CA). The CA is not responsible for design concept, design criteria, compliance with codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost

estimating, or construction management. The CA may assist with problem‐solving

non‐conformance or deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the

general contractor and the A/E team. The primary role of the CA is to develop and coordinate the execution of a testing plan, observe and document performance—that

systems are functioning in accordance with the documented design intent and the

Contract Documents.

i. Construction and Acceptance Phase

a. Coordinates and directs all commissioning activities in a logical and

efficient manner. Work with the GC and PM to ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled.

b. Revise, as necessary, the Commissioning Plan. c. Plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting.

d. Request and review additional information required to perform

commissioning tasks, including O&M materials, contractor start‐up

and checkout procedures, and sequences of operation.

e. Review Contractor submittals applicable to systems being

commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs, concurrent with the A/E reviews.

f. Develop start‐up and checkout plan with Subs. Write and distribute

pre‐functional checklists.

g. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. Attend selected planning and job‐site meetings to

obtain information on construction progress.

h. Review completed pre‐functional checklist and start‐up reports for

owner approval. i. Coordinate any start‐up requirements with TAB contractor.

j. Write the functional performance test procedures for equipment

and systems. Submit to PM and A/E for review. k. Coordinate, witness, and document functional performance tests

performed by installing contractors. Coordinate retesting as necessary until satisfactory performance is achieved.

Page 89 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

l. Maintain a master deficiency and resolution record. Provide the PM with written progress reports and test results with recommended

actions. m. Review the training of the Owner’s operating personnel.

n. Review the preparation of the O&M manuals.

o. Provide a final commissioning report. ii. Warranty Period

a. Coordinate and supervise required seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency corrections.

b. Assist in the development of a preventative maintenance plan and

review as‐built documentation.

5. Owner’s Project Manager (PM)

i. Construction and Acceptance Phase

a. Arrange for facility operating and maintenance personnel to attend various field commissioning activities and field training sessions

according to the Commissioning Plan. b. Provide final approval for the completion of the commissioning

work. 6. General Contractor (GC)

i. Construction and Acceptance Phase

a. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CA. b. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change

orders and approved submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment to the CA.

c. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include

requirements for submittal data, O&M data, commissioning tasks and training.

d. Ensure that all Subs execute their commissioning responsibilities according to the Contract Documents and schedule.

e. A representative shall attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings scheduled by the CA to facilitate the

commissioning process.

f. Coordinate the training of owner personnel. g. Prepare O&M manuals, according to the Contract Documents,

including clarifying and updating the original sequences of

operation to as‐built conditions.

ii. Warranty Period

a. Ensure that Subs execute required seasonal or deferred functional performance testing.

b. Ensure that Subs correct deficiencies and make necessary

adjustments to O&M manuals and as‐built drawings for issues

identified in seasonal testing. 7. Mechanical, Controls and TAB Contractors. The commissioning responsibilities

applicable to each of the mechanical, controls and TAB contractors are as follows: i. Construction and Acceptance Phases

a. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the Cx process.

b. Contractors shall provide the CA with normal cut sheets and shop

drawing submittals of commissioned equipment. c. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M

manual submittals, to the CA for development of start‐up and

functional testing procedures.

Page 90 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

d. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in

areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing

procedures.

e. Develop a full start‐up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s

start‐up procedures and the pre‐functional checklists from the CA for

all commissioned equipment. Submit to CA for review and approval

prior to startup. f. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the

mechanical‐related portions of the pre‐functional checklists for all

commissioned equipment. Perform and clearly document all

completed startup and system operational checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CA.

g. Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing. Air and water TAB shall be completed with discrepancies and problems

remedied before functional testing of the respective air‐or water‐related systems.

h. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the CA

for specified equipment.

i. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the CA, PM and A/E and retest the

equipment. j. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents,

including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation

to as‐built conditions.

k. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel as specified.

l. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific

requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty. ii. Warranty Period

a. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the CA, according to the commissioning plan.

b. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M

manuals and as‐built drawings for applicable issues identified in any

seasonal testing.

8. Electrical Contractors. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the electrical contractor may include the items listed in 1.08 B.

1.04 Submittals Required 1.05 Quality Assurance

1.06 Scheduling 1.07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

1.08 Regulatory Requirements

A. The building commissioning scope must be completed prior to the issuance of substantial

completion of the project.

B. Systems to be Commissioned

1. The following systems ARE TYPICALLY commissioned.

HVAC System Electrical System

Chillers Generator Pumps Sweep or scheduled lighting controls

Page 91 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

Cooling tower Daylight dimming controls Boilers Lighting occupancy sensors

Piping systems Power quality Ductwork Security system

Variable frequency drives Emergency power system

Air handlers UPS systems Packaged units (AC and HP) Fire and smoke alarm

Terminal units (air) Fire protection systems Unit heaters Communications system

Heat exchangers Public address/paging Computer room units Distribution Cable

Fume hoods Main Breaker

Lab room pressures Ground Fault Detection Specialty fans Automatic Transfer Switch

Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Chemical treatment systems

Other Systems HVAC control system Irrigation systems

Fire and smoke HVAC interlocks Fire Management System Indoor air quality Service water booster pumps

Equipment sound control Refrigeration systems Equipment vibration control Kitchen Equipment

Egress pressurization Plumbing systems

C. Building Envelope Analysis – The analysis as conducted through the commissioning process

shall include the following tasks:

1 Prepare Building Enclosure Moisture Management Observations and Building

Preparation Survey 2 Produce a Building Preparation Measures and Air Barrier Test Plan prior to testing and

diagnostics. 3 Prepare a Building for Whole Building Air and Thermal Barrier Testing and Diagnostics

4 Conduct Whole Building Air and Thermal Barrier Testing with Infrared Thermography

and Smoke Generation Diagnostics 5 Produce an Air, Thermal & Moisture Barrier Report; to include test results, diagnostics,

recommendations, and prioritized order of magnitude repair or remediation approximated cost estimates.

Part 2: Products

2.01 Manufacturers 2.02 Products

Part 3: Execution

3.01 Preparation 3.02 Installation

A. Start‐up, Pre‐functional Checklists and Initial Checkout

1. The following procedures apply to all equipment to be commissioned.

2. General. Pre‐functional Checklists are developed and completed for all major

equipment and systems being commissioned. The checklist captures equipment

nameplate and characteristics data, confirming the as‐built status of the equipment or

system. These checklists also ensure that the systems are complete and operational,

Page 92 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

so that the functional performance testing can be scheduled. The checklists are created by the CA, and completed (filled out) by the installing contractor.

3. Start‐up and Initial Checkout Plan. The CA shall assist the commissioning team

members responsible for startup of any equipment in developing detailed start‐up

plans for all equipment. The primary role of the CA in this process is to ensure that

there is written documentation that each of the manufacturer‐recommended

procedures have been completed. i. The CA creates the pre‐functional checklists, based primarily on the

manufacturer’s startup and initial checkout procedures. Each checkout item

will have a place to document that proper installation has occurred. Once

the pre‐functional checklist is completed by the installing contractor, this

signifies to the commissioning team that the equipment is properly installed

per manufacturer’s procedures, and the controls and TAB are complete and the equipment is ready for final functional performance testing. The

Contractor determines which Sub is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line item tasks.

4. Sensor Calibration. Calibration of all sensors shall be included as part of the pre‐functional checklists performed by the Contractors.

5. Execution of Pre‐functional Checklists and Startup.

i. Subs and vendors schedule startup and checkout with the PM, GC and

CA.

ii. The CA shall observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are multiple units, (in which case a

sampling strategy may be used as approved by the PM).

iii. For lower‐level components of equipment, (e.g., VAV boxes, reheat

coils), the CA shall observe a sampling of the pre‐functional and start‐up

procedures. The sampling procedures are identified in the commissioning

plan. iv. The Subs and vendors shall execute startup and provide the CA with a

signed and dated copy of the completed start‐up and pre‐functional

checklists. v. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line

item task on the pre‐functional checklist was actually performed shall

initial or check that item off.

6. Deficiencies, Non‐Conformance and Approval in Checklists and Startup.

i. The Subs shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start‐up

and pre‐functional procedures that were not completed successfully, at

the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The

procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies are provided to the CA

within two days of test completion. ii. The CA reviews the report and recommends approval to the PM. The CA

shall work with the Subs and vendors to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. The CA will involve the PM and others as

necessary.

B. Functional Performance Testing

1 Objectives and Scope. The objective of functional performance testing is to

demonstrate that each system is operating according to the documented design intent

and Contract Documents. In general, each system should be operated through all modes of operation (seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm‐up, cool‐down, part‐and

full‐load) where there is a specified system response. Verifying each sequence in the

Page 93 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

sequences of operation is required. Proper responses to such modes and conditions as power failure, freeze condition, low oil pressure, no flow, equipment failure, etc. shall

also be tested. 2 Development of Test Procedures. Before test procedures are written, the CA shall

obtain all requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting

equipment or systems, including an updated points list, program code, control sequences and parameters. The CA shall develop specific test procedures and forms

to verify and document proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. Prior to execution, the CA shall provide a copy of the test procedures to the Sub(s)

who shall review the tests for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection.

The CA shall review owner‐contracted or factory testing which the CA is not

responsible to oversee and shall determine what further testing may be required to

comply with the Specifications. Redundancy of testing shall be minimized.

i. The test procedure forms developed by the CA shall include the following information:

a. System and equipment or component name(s). b. Equipment location and ID number.

c. Date. d. Project name.

e. Participating parties.

f. Reference to the specification section describing the test requirements.

g. A copy of the specific sequence of operations. h. Instructions for setting up the test.

i. Special cautions, alarm limits, etc.

j. Specific step‐by‐step procedures to execute the test.

k. Acceptance criteria of proper performance with a Yes / No check

box.

l. A section for comments. m. Signatures and date block for the CA.

C. Test Methods.

1 Functional performance testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or by monitoring the

performance and analyzing the results using the control system’s trend log capabilities

or by stand‐alone dataloggers. The CA will determine which method is most

appropriate.

2 Setup. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate

actual conditions as close as is practically possible. The Sub executing the test shall provide all necessary materials, system modifications, etc. to produce the necessary

flows, pressures, temperatures, etc. necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, the Sub shall return all affected

building equipment and systems, due to these temporary modifications, to their pre‐test condition.

3 Sampling. Multiple identical pieces of non‐life‐safety or non‐critical equipment may be

functionally tested using a sampling strategy. The sampling strategy will be developed

by the CA and approved by the PM. If, after three attempts at testing the specified sample percentage, failures are still present, then all remaining units are tested at the

contractors’ expense.

4 Coordination and Scheduling. The Subs shall provide sufficient notice to the CA regarding their completion schedule for the pre‐functional checklists and startup of all

equipment and systems. The CA will schedule functional tests through the PM, GC and

Page 94 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

affected Subs. The CA shall direct, witness and document the functional testing of all equipment and systems. The Subs shall execute the tests.

5 Problem Solving. The CA will recommend solutions to problems found; however the burden of responsibility to solve, correct and retest problems is with the GC, Subs and

A/E team.

D. Documentation, Non‐conformance and Approval of Tests

1. Documentation. The CA shall witness and document the results of all functional performance tests using forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these

forms may be provided to the PM for review and approval if the PM desires.

2. Non‐Conformance.

i. The CA will record the results of the functional test on the procedure or

test form. All deficiencies or non‐conformance issues shall be noted and

reported to the PM on a standard form. ii. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests

at the discretion of the CA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution

will be documented on the procedure form. iii. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize

unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures.

iv. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified:

a. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the responsibility to correct it:

1. The CA documents the deficiency and the Sub’s response and intentions the testing continues. The Sub corrects the

deficiency and notifies the CA that the equipment is ready to be retested.

2. The CA reschedules the test and the test is repeated.

b. If there is a dispute about a deficiency or who is responsible: 1)

The deficiency shall be documented on the non‐compliance form

and a copy given to the PM and GC.

1. Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are brought into the discussions as

needed. Final interpretive authority is with the A/E team. Final acceptance authority is with the Project Manager.

2. The CA documents the resolution process.

3. Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party corrects the deficiency and notifies the CA

that the equipment is ready to be retested. The CA reschedules the test and the test is repeated until satisfactory

performance is achieved.

c. Cost of Retesting. 1. The cost for the Sub to retest a pre‐functional or functional

test, if they are responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs.

If they are not responsible, any cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC.

2. The time for the CA and PM to direct any retesting required

because a specific pre‐functional checklist or start‐up test item,

reported to have been successfully completed, but determined

during functional testing to be faulty, will be backcharged to the GC, who may choose to recover costs from the party

responsible for executing the faulty pre‐functional test.

Page 95 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

3. Approval. The CA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form. Formal approval of the functional test is made later after review by the CA. The CA

recommends acceptance of each test to the PM. The PM gives final approval on each test, providing a signed copy to the CA and the Contractor.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. Standard O&M Manuals. i. CA Review and Approval. Prior to substantial completion, the CA shall

review the O&M manuals, documentation and redline as‐builts for

systems that were commissioned to verify compliance with the Specifications. The CA will communicate deficiencies in the manuals to

the PM.

2. Commissioning Record in O&M Manuals. i. The CA is responsible to compile, organize and index all commissioning

data by equipment into labeled, indexed and tabbed, three‐ring binders

and deliver it to the PM. Three copies of the manuals will be provided. The manuals shall include the Commissioning Plan, Final Commissioning

Report, System Type, Startup and Pre‐functional checklists, Functional

performance tests, trending and analysis, approvals and corrections, training plan, records, and approvals.

F. Training of Owner Personnel

1 The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and for ensuring that training is completed.

2 The CA shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy

of the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment. i. The specific training requirements of Owner personnel by Subs and

vendors are specified in the appropriate division. ii. For the primary HVAC equipment, the Controls Contractor shall provide a

short discussion of the control of the equipment during the mechanical

or electrical training conducted by others.

G. Deferred Testing

1. Seasonal Testing. During the warranty period, seasonal testing (tests delayed until

weather conditions are closer to the system’s design) shall be completed as part of this contract. The CA shall coordinate this activity. Tests will be executed,

documented and deficiencies corrected by the appropriate Subs, with facilities staff

and the CA witnessing. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and as‐builts due

to the testing will be made. Commissioning team members should assume that a

small portion of functional testing of the heating systems will occur in the early winter.

END OF SECTION 01 91 00

Page 96 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

FINISH HARDWARE A. PREAMBLE

1. Pre-installation conference shall be conducted prior to installation of hardware at Project site. Meet with the Owner, Contractor, installer, hardware supplier, and manufacturer's representatives. Review catalogs, brochures, templates, installation instructions, and the approved hardware schedule. Survey installation procedures and workmanship, with special emphasis on unusual conditions, as to ensure correct technique of installation, and coordination with other work. Notify participants at least 5 working days before conference.

2. The manufacturer's representatives for the locking devices and closing devices must inspect and approve, in writing, the installation of their product. Hardware installed incorrectly must be reported to the Architect prior to the Architect's final punch list.

PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

B. Hardware specified herein is to cover all necessary material required to full y complete the hardware requirements of specified openings. It is the intention that the hardware specified shall be of sufficient quantities necessary to complete the Work. Notify the Architect of omissions or discrepancies prior to bid date for clarifications or instructions. Adjustments to the Contract sum will not be allowed for omissions not clarified prior to bid opening.

C. This Section includes the following: 1. Hinges. 2. Key control system. 3. Lock cylinders and keys. 4. Lock and latch sets. 5. Flush bolts, surface bolts. 6. Exit devices. 7. Push/pull units. 8. Closers. 9. Overhead holders. 10. Miscellaneous door control devices. 11. Door trim units. 12. Protection plates. 13. Weatherstripping for exterior doors. 14. Sound stripping for interior doors. 15. Automatic drop seals (door bottoms). 16. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors. 17. Thresholds.

D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include: 1. Cylinders for locks on overhead, coiling, sliding, revolving doors.

Page 97 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

2. Permanent cylinders to be furnished and installed by the Construction Manager / General Contractor. Permanent keys to be installed by Owner or Owner's security agent.1

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door

hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

B. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize

schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:

i. Vertical format. Horizontal format will not be reviewed and will be returned marked "Not Approved."

ii. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. iii. Maximum allowable degree of swing and door handing. iv. Fire rating. v. Name and manufacturer of each item. vi. Fastenings and other pertinent information. vii. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on

Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. viii. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in

schedule. ix. Mounting locations for hardware. x. Door and frame sizes and materials. xi. Keying information.

2. Keying Schedule: Owner keyed, keying system. C. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the

installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

D. Maintenance manuals for each different hardware item, including operations and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturers' and installers' maintenance personnel. Submit for Owners information at Project close-out as specified in Division 1.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) for a single manufacturer.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.

1 Updated 11/09/2016

Page 98 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.

2. Hardware supplier shall be a certified direct distributor and be a full sales and service organization for the manufacturers listed. Compliance with this Section shall include letters of certification from the manufacturers certifying the hardware supplier is a factory-direct authorized distributor. Certifications shall be submitted for approval with and be incorporated with hardware schedule submittal. Submittals will not be considered without the certifications.

C. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Where through-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each through-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

E. Wiring and Riser Diagrams: Equipment supplier shall furnish General Contractor electrical wiring and riser diagrams for low voltage security equipment specified in this Section. Provide elevation drawings indicating door numbers, associated electronic security equipment such as power supplies and interconnections between door system components, control wiring for electric locks, control panels, indicator signal lights and sounding devices which are contained in the approved hardware Submittals. Elevations shall indicate standard electrical enclosures detailing the manufacturer's space and attaching requirements.

F. Where exit devices are required on fire-rated doors (with supplementary marking on door label indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with "Fire Exit Hardware"), provide label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware."

1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.

C. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site).

D. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

1.05 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. Present special tools and maintenance instructions to Owner at time of testing and demonstration interval.

Page 99 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

B. Preinstallation conference shall be conducted prior to installation of hardware at Project site. Meet with the Owner, Contractor, installer, hardware supplier, and manufacturers' representatives. Review catalogs, brochures, templates, installation instructions, and the approved hardware schedule. Survey installation procedures and workmanship, with special emphasis on unusual conditions, as to ensure correct technique of installation and coordination with other work. Notify participants at least 5 working days before conference.

C. General Warranty: Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. Hardware Manufacturers Warranty: All hardware shall be free of defects and imperfections in manufacture and finish. Hardware shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to perform all the various functions required for 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.

E. Provide the following special warranty for the following items: 1. Continuous Hinges: 10 years 2. Lockset, Cylinders, and Latchsets: 10 years 3. Door Closers: 30 years 4. Pneumatic Operators: 2 years 5. Exit Devices: 3 years 6. Electrical Security Products: 2 years

PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: 5 knuckle

i. Approved Manufacturers. Hager, Ives, McKinney, Stanley. ii. No electric hinges allowed; use power transfer EPT by VonDuprin.

2. Continuous Hinges: i. Coordinate with BVSD for Approved Manufacturers. ii. Applications include openings subject to high traffic or abusive areas.

Exterior entry doors, vestibule doors, doors greater than 36" in width, and interior gymnasium doors at high schools and middle schools shall be included.

iii. Exterior aluminum doors to have aluminum continuous geared hinges; manufacturers: Ives II2HD.

iv. Hollow metal doors to have stainless steel pinned continuous hinge: Ives 700, no substitution

3. Key Control System:. i. Schlage Lock, Div. Allegion, PLC: Coordinate with BVSD.

4. Locksets, Latchsets, and Deadbolts: i. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand: ND Series, Lever Design. ii. School District standard 2006 is Schlage ND-Series cylindrical locks., with

Rhodes lever handle. In major remodel projects all lock cylinders shall be replaced to coordinate with district standards (2006) Schlage ND-Series) All locksets shall be "Vandlgard" cylindrical locks and lever hardware.

Page 100 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

iii. All classroom and office locksets shall be "Pushbutton type", ND9I (lockable from the interior space without entering the corridor.) Confirm this function with District Project Manager at time of specification. Not finalized as of Nov 2014.

iv. Typically, provide only (1) cylinder on opening side, for each pair of doors. 5. Exit/Panic Devices:

i. Von Duprin, Div. Allegion, PLC: 99L with 299 strike. Furnish XP99 Series at exterior And Vestibule doors.

ii. Removable Mullions: Von Duprin, Div. Allegion PLC: KR4954. Keyed removable mullions should be specified at the following locations:

1. One pair of exterior entrance doors. Coordinate all locations with BVSD.

2. One pair of doors from corridor to auditorium near (or on) platform or stage, and any pairs of exterior doors at stage, gymnasium, media center, or multi-purpose room.

3. District does not use mullion stabilizers. iii. Provide exterior trim 990 DT and 99 NL and interior trim. iv. Vestibules with push/pull use dummy bar 330 with 990DT v. Electric panic devices: use "QEL" Quiet Electric Latch Retraction; Main

Entry exterior doors with "QEL" option may have SD (special dogging) option included- this is on a project by project basis; confirm with District Project Manager at time of specification; include RX switch; include LX switch at openings with automatic operators.

vi. Large interior classroom doors that require panic hardware should have inside cylinder Option that allows locking of outside trim from the interior: 99-2 with 996 lever and 2SI indicator.

vii. Install all panic/exit devices with sex nuts and bolts. viii. Power Transfers: EPT by Von Duprin, no electric hinges allowed.

6. Door Closers and Magnetic Holders: i. LCN, Div. Allegion, PLC, with Extra Duty Parallel Arm. 4040XP Series. ii. Regular arm may be used in special applications not subject to

vandalism. iii. Surface closers should be used on all doors where closers are scheduled. iv. Parallel arm mounting shall be used in every possible application. v. Brackets should be used where regular arm mounting is impractical. vi. No closers are to be mounted where exposed to the weather. vii. All closers should be non-hold open type except as specifically noted in

scheduling guide. viii. Furnish closers with optional screw-on cover indicated by special

template: ST-3596. ix. Install all closers using thru bolts with machine or wood screws as

determined by the door material. (ie: TBWMS) x. At exterior doors: "EDA" arm with bollard. No overhead stops allowed. xi. ARCHITECT TO SPECIFY IN BOTH DIVISION 8 AND DIVISION 16

THAT MAGNETIC HOLD OPENS ARE TO BE FURNISHED AS PART OF DIVISION 8 SCOPE OF WORK, AND INSTALLED AS PART OF DIVISION 16, TO PREVENT DUPLICATION OF SCOPE.

7. Automatic Operators: i. LCN, Div. Allegion PLC: 4840 at All Schools ii. Boulder Valley School District facilities staff and Allegion representative to

coordinate auto operator control box installation location, and other

Page 101 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

specifics related. It is important that the project Architect and Electrical Consultants understand the limitations, as well as where to land 120v connection for the control box.2

8. Flush Bolts, Automatic Flush Bolts, Coordinators: i. Coordinate with BVSD.

9. Push/Pull Units: 4" x 16" plates i. Coordinate with BVSD. ii. Manufacturers: Ives, Trimco, Rockwood.

10. Door Trim Units: i. Coordinate with BVSD. ii. Manufacturers: Ives, Trimco, Rockwood.

11. Door Stripping, Seals, and Threshold: i. Coordinate with BVSD. Brush type seals. 1/4" or 1/2" height on threshold.

(1/2" height at exterior doors.). ii. Manufacturers: Pemko, National Guard.

12. Door Stops: Stop locations in order of preference are as follows: i. Wall ii. Floor iii. Overhead iv. Closer hold-open/stop

2.02 SCHEDULED HARDWARE

A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designators: The product designation and name of one

manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.

B. CLARIFICATION OF WHERE TO SPECIFY ELECTRIC PRODUCTS3 1. At new construction projects or a remodel where there is a new door, new

hardware i. Electric Products to be specified & furnished in 087100 – Door

Hardware: 1. All power transfers (generally an EPT; but could be an electric

hinge or door cord if the frame is existing) 2. Electric locksets 3. Electric panic device & accessories (ie: RX, LX switches) 4. Low Energy Automatic Operators (LCN Pneumatic type) and

accessories (pneumatic transfer, actuator switches, control box.) ii. Electric Products to be specified & scheduled in 087100 –Door

Hardware, but furnished by Division 28 – Electronic Access Control. 1. All Power Supplies, including those for electric panic devices 2. Door contacts (door position switch)

2 Added 10/02/2017 3 Added 10/02/2017

Page 102 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

2. At remodel projects where door is existing, new hardware: i. Electric Products to be specified & scheduled in 087100 – Door

Hardware, but furnished by Division 28 – Electronic Access Control: 1. All power transfers (generally a door cord but could be an electric

hinge or EPT) 2. Electric locksets 3. Electric panic device & accessories (ie: RX, LX switches) 4. Retrofit kits to modify a mechanical panic to an electric panic:

a. Includes QEL base plate kits b. RX, LX switch kits

5. Retrofit monitor switch kits (RX,LX) 6. Door contacts (door position switch) 7. All power supplies.

ii. Low Energy Operators will always be specified and furnished in 087100 Door Hardware.

3. Low Energy Operators – i. Always specified and furnished in 087100. ii. Timothy Slaughter with Allegion will prepare coordination and installation

Instructions that BVSD can include in the District Technical Guide provided to the project designers. It is Important that the project Architect and Electrical Consultants understand limitations on the location of the control box and where to locate the 120v for the control box.

2.03 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.

C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.

D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.

E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where through-

Page 103 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provid sleeves for each through-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

2.04 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS

A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and frames, install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors and frames, install wood screws. 3. For fire-rated wood doors, install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel

wood screws. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.

C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out-Swing Doors: Nonremovable pins. 2. Out-Swing Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins; including interior doors. 3. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins. 4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves. 5. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges

per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. Unless otherwise specified, hinge size for doors through 3' -0" shall be 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches.

6. Hinges for doors over 3' -0" wide shall be four ball bearing, heavy weight, 0.190 gauge inches, 5 inches x 4-1/2 inches.

7. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges.

8. Use heavy weight hinges at: Gym, Auditorium, Stairwells, Cross orridors, cafeteria.

2.05 CONTINUOUS HINGES:

A. Pinned Stainless Steel: use at heavy use hollow metal doors where requested. 1. Fabricate units from heavy-duty 14 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, certified to

exceed 6,000,000 full load operating cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. Hinges shall be rated at 600 pound weight capacity. Ives 700, no substitution.

2. Provide hinge guard type continuous hinge to prevent door edges from abusive conditions. Manufacture units for proper door thickness, height, custom screw patterns and electrical modifications.

B. Aluminum Geared Hinges: at aluminum storefront entrance doors. Design based on Ives II2HD.

2.06 KEYING SYSTEMS

A. Combinating and keying shall be performed by Schiage Lock Company or as directed by Owner.

B. Equip locks, cylinders, and cores with keyway as directed by Owner. Confirm with District Project Manager at time of specification. (generally use Restricted keyways by Schlage - some Everest "D" and some Everest "29T.) District uses standard cylinders; no interchangeable cores.

Page 104 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

C. Construction keying: 1. Exterior door cylinders shall be equipped with temporary construction cylinder

until the building is turned over to the Owner. Also interior doors at Mechanical and Electric Rooms and other interior doors as directed by Owner shall be equipped with temporary construction cylinder. Confirm doors with District Project Manager at time of specification. (ie: ND96PD with construction keying; list permanent keyed cylinder in a separate line item in specification: ie: 23-065 permanent cylinder.)

2. Balance of interior doors standard color range; 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

D. Nylon brush filament shall be wrapped around a core wire, locked in a metal spline, and encased in an anodized aluminum flange for attachment. Nylon shall remain pliable within a temperature range of 400 degrees F to minimum -40 degrees F below zero. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

E. Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as shown or scheduled.

F. Provide drip caps at exterior doors. G. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include: 1. National Guard Products: 426A/613A A626A C627A 2525 16A 2. Pemko Manufacturing: 172A1272A 45061CP 3452CP S88D 3460 (specify %"

high thresholds at exterior doors)

2.13 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Match items to manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets (or push-pull units if no latch or locksets).

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

C. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S . finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.

D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. 1. Satin Chrome, Clear Coated: US26D /ANSI 626, ANSI 652. 2. Powder Coated Aluminum Finish: ANSI 689, for door closers, magnetic holders,

removable mullions and continuous hinges unless otherwise specified. 3. Exterior Hinges: Satin Chrome, US 26D /ANSI 652, except as noted. Interior and

fire-rated door hinges: U527D /AN SI 652. 4. Thresholds: mill aluminum finish. Weatherseal: clear anodized aluminum finish.

PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

Page 105 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

A. Examine substrates to which hardware assemblies attach to hollow metal frames, doors and walls, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, blocking and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications,

except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 2. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and

Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 3. NVVVVDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush

Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic seal ant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."

F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or

occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door

hardware and hardware finishes. D. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial

Completion, the Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work:

Page 106 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 10/02/2017 Department of Operational Services

1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements.

2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures.

3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or

E. installation of hardware units. 1. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial

nature) in the performance of the hardware. 2. Manufacturer's representatives for locksets, cylinders, exit devices and door

closers are to inspect and approve, in writing, certification that items have been properly installed and are functioning in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures after installation. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.

F. Testing and Demonstration: The Contractor shall provide, as part of the system start-up

G. responsibilities, a complete data base with respect to electro-mechanical security hardware items, functions, and features. Testing shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, demonstration in the operational use of all electronic security hardware. Electrical circuits for each locking system opening shall be tested by the representative of the security hardware manufacturer or supplier and shall be certified as having compatible voltage, protection against overload, and duty cycle capability consistent with the operation and installation.

3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware" hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule and in the following schedule of hardware sets.

B. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. Notify the Architect of omissions or discrepancies prior to bid date for clarifications or instructions. Adjustments to the Contract Sum will not be allowed for omissions not clarified prior to bid opening.

END OF SECTION

Page 107 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

Fire Detection and Alarm 28 31 001

SECTION ONE: GENERAL

1.1 Scope

This specification document provides the requirements for installation, programming and

configuration of a complete addressable fire alarm system. This system shall include, but not be limited to, system cabinet, power supply, built in Signaling Line Circuit (SLC), 80 character LCD

annunciator, six programmable "Flexput" circuits, built in dual line Digital Communicator associated

peripheral devices, batteries, wiring, conduit and other relevant components and accessories required to furnish a complete and operational Life Safety System.

1.2 Work Included

1.2.1 General Requirements

The contractor shall furnish and install a complete 24 VDC, electrically supervised, analog addressable fire alarm system as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. The system shall

include but not be limited to all control panels, power supplies, initiating devices, audible and visual notification appliances, alarm devices, and all accessories required to provide a complete operating

fire alarm system.

1.2.2 Listings

All fire alarm system equipment shall be listed for it's intended purpose and be compatibility listed

to assure the integrity of the complete system.

1.3 Standards

The fire alarm equipment and installation shall comply with the current provisions of the following

standards and shall be listed for it's intended purpose and be compatibility listed to insure integrity of the complete system.

1.3.1 National Electric Code, Article 760

1.3.2 National Fire Protection Association Standards:

NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code

NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

1.3.3 Local and State Building Codes

1.3.4 Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction

1.3.5 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

All equipment shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for it's intended purpose, listed

as power limited by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for the following standards as applicable:

1 Added Section to Technical Guide Appendix 02/24/2016

Page 108 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

UL 864 UOJZ Control units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems Local Signaling Unit

Central Station Signaling Protected Premises Unit Remote Signaling Protected Premises Unit.

Water Deluge Releasing Unit

UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling systems. UL 268A Smoke Detectors for duct applications

UL 217 Smoke Detectors for Single Stations UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling systems.

UL 228 Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling systems. UL 464 Audible Signaling appliances

UL 1638 Visual Signaling appliances

UL 38 Manually Activated Signaling Boxes UL 346 Waterflow indicators for Fire Protective Signaling systems.

UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling systems.

1.3.6 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

All visual Notification appliances and manual pull stations shall comply with the requirements of the

Americans with Disabilities Act.

1.4 General Requirements

1.4.1 Manufacturers/Distributors Services:

1.4.1.1 The following supervision shall be provided by a factory trained service technician from the

distributor of the fire alarm equipment. The technician shall be factory trained and shall have a minimum of five (5) years of service experience in the fire alarm industry. The technician's name

shall appear on equipment submittals and a copy of his manufactures dealer agreement shall be

sent to the project engineer. The technician shall be responsible for the following items:

a) A pre installation visit to the job site to review equipment submittals and to verify the method by which the system is to be wired.

b) During the installation the trained technician shall be on site or make periodic visits to verify

installation and wiring of the system. He shall also supervise the completion of conduit rough, wires pulled into conduit and wiring rough, and ready for trim.

c) Upon completion of wiring, final checkout and certification of the system shall be made under the supervision of the technician.

d) At the time of the formal checkout, technician shall give operational instructions to the owner and or his representative on the system.

1.4.2 Contract close-out Submittals

Deliver two (2) copies of the following to the owner's representative within Thirty (30) days of system acceptance. The closeout submittals shall include:

1) Installation and Programming manuals for the installed Life Safety System. 2) Point to point diagrams of the entire Life Safety System as installed. This shall include all

connected Smoke Detectors and addressable field modules.

Page 109 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

1.4.3 Submittals

The contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of documentation within thirty (30) calendar days after award of the purchase order. Indicated in the document will be the type, size, rating,

style, catalog number, manufacturers’ names, photos, and /or catalog data sheets for all items

proposed to meet these specifications. The proposed equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer and no equipment shall be ordered or installed on the premises without that

approval.

NOTE: DOCUMENTATION - Submittal of shop drawings shall contain at least three (3) copies of original manufacturer specification and installation instruction sheets. Subsequent information may

be copies. All equipment and devices on the shop drawings to be furnished under this contract shall

be clearly marked in the specification sheets.

Supplier’s qualifications shall be submitted indicating years in business, service policies, warranty definitions, NICET certification, and completion of factory training program and a list of similar

installations.

Contractor qualifications shall be supplied indicating years in business and prior experience with

installations that include the type of equipment that is to be supplied.

The contractor shall provide hourly Service Rates for this installed Life Safety System with the submittal. These hourly service rates shall be guaranteed for a 1-year period.

1.4.4 Warranty

Warranty all materials, installation and workmanship for a two (2) year period, or equal to the Manufacturer’s warranty. A copy of the manufacturer warranty shall be provided with the close out

documentation.

1.4.5 Products

This Life Safety System Specification must be conformed to in its entirety to ensure that the installed

and programmed Life Safety System will accommodate all of the requirements and operations

required by the building owner. Any specified item or operational feature not specifically addressed prior to the bid date will be required to be met without exception.

Submission of product purported to be equal to those specified herein will be considered as possible

substitutes only when all of the following requirements have been met:

1) Any deviation from the equipment, operations, methods, design or other criteria specified herein

must be submitted in detail to the specifying Architect or Engineer a minimum of ten (10) working days prior to the scheduled submission of bids. Each deviation from the operation detailed in these

specifications must be documented in detail, including page number and section number, which lists the system function for which the substitution is being proposed.

2) A complete list of such substituted products with three (3) copies of working drawings thereof shall be submitted to the approved Architect and/or Consulting Engineer not less than ten (10)

working days prior to the scheduled submission of bids.

3) The contractor or substitute bidder shall functionally demonstrate that the proposed substitute products are in fact equal in quality and performance to those specified herein.

Page 110 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

1.4.6 General Equipment and Materials Requirements

All equipment furnished for this project shall be new and unused. All components shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices and other facilities covered

by this specification or noted on the contract drawings and installation specification shall be best

suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer. If any of the equipment provided under this specification is provided by different manufacturers, then that equipment shall

be "Listed" as to its compatibility by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), if such compatibility is required by UL standards.

1.4.7 Satisfying the Entire Intent of these Specifications

It is the contractor's responsibility to meet the entire intent of these specifications.

Deviations from the specified items shall be at the risk of the contractor until the date of final acceptance by the architect, engineer, and owner's representative.

All costs for removal, relocation, or replacement of a substituted item shall be at the risk of the electrical contractor.

SECTION TWO: SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 General

The listed manufactures are Silent Knight, and Farenhyt by Honeywell NO Substitutions.

2.1.1 Control Panel

The fire alarm control panel (FACP) shall an analog addressable control panel. The FACP must

supervise low battery, loss of AC and loss of communication.

The FACP must have Drift Compensation sensitivity capabilities on detectors. The communication protocol on the SLC loop must be digital.

The FACP must support a minimum of six programmable "Flexput" circuits. The panel must have a built in 80 character LCD annunciator with the capability of having an additional eight supervised

remote annunciators connected in the field.

The FACP must have a built in UL approved digital communicator. The communicator must allow local up/downloading of system operating options, event history, and detector sensitivity data.

The FACP must automatically test the smoke detectors in compliance with NFPA standards to ensure

that they are within listed sensitivity parameters and be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for this purpose.

The preference of BVSD is to have IP-DACT (IP-DACT-2/IP-DACT-2UD) connected to all new fire

alarm control panels as manufactured by Silent Knight or Fahrenheit by Silent Knight. Verify each

projects construction documents for appropriate communication method. Include all necessary connections or kits for operational communication to BVSC monitoring.

The FACP must compensate for the accumulation of contaminants that affect detector sensitivity.

Maintenance alert feature (differentiated from trouble condition), detector sensitivity selection, auto-programming mode (Jumpstart) and the ability to upgrade the core operating software on site

Page 111 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

or over the telephone.

The FACP shall have a Jumpstart feature that can automatically enroll all properly connected accessories into a functional system within 60 seconds of powering up the panel.

2.1.2 System Wiring

The SLC and Data Communication Bus shall be wired with standard NEC 760 compliant wiring, no twisted, shielded or mid capacitance wiring is required for standard installations. All FACP screw

terminals shall be capable of accepting 14-18 AWG wire.

2.1.3 Signaling Line Circuits

Each SLC shall be capable of a wiring distance of 10,000 feet from the SLC driver module. The

communication protocol to SLC devices must be digital. Any SLC loop device, which goes into alarm, must interrupt the polling cycle for priority response from the FACP. The FACP must

respond consistently to a device that goes into alarm on an SLC in under 3 seconds. The SLC shall

be capable of functioning in a class A or class B configuration.

2.1.4 SLC loop devices

Devices supported must include analog photoelectric, analog heat detectors, addressable input modules, relay output modules or addressable notification modules. There is to be no limit to the

number of any particular device type.

2.1.5 Analog detector functions

The products of combustion detectors must communicate analog values using a digital protocol to

the control panel for the following functions:

Automatic compliance with NFPA 72 standards for detector sensitivity testing

Drift compensation to assure detector is operating correctly Maintenance alert when a detector nears the trouble condition

Trouble alert when a detector is out of tolerance

Alert control panel of analog values that indicate fire.

2.1.6 Programmable Flexputs

The FACP shall support four programmable Flexput circuits that are capable of being programmed as supervised reverse polarity notification circuits or supervised auxiliary power circuits that can be

programmed as continuous, resettable or door holder power. These circuits shall be programmable

for Class B operation.

2.1.7 Annunciators

The main control must have a built in annunciator with an 80-character LCD display and feature

LED's for General alarm, Supervisory, System trouble, System Silence and Power. When in the normal condition the LCD shall display time and date based on a 200 year clock which is capable of

automatic daylight savings time adjustments. The annunciator must be able to silence and reset alarms through the use of a keypad-entered code, or by using a firefighter’s key. The annunciators

must have two levels of user codes that will allow the limitation of operating system programming to authorized individuals.

Page 112 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

2.1.8 Remote Annunciators

The fire system shall be capable of supporting up to eight remote annunciators. LCD Remote

annunciators shall have the same control and display layout so that they match identically the built

in annunciator. LED Remote annunciators shall have individually mapped LED's and reset and silence inputs. The reset and silence inputs must use the same firefighter’s key as the LCD

annunciators. Remote annunciators shall be capable of operating at a distance of 6000 feet from the main control panel on unshielded non-twisted cable.

2.1.9 Serial/Parallel interface

The fire system shall be capable of supporting up to two serial / parallel interfaces that are capable of driving standard computer style printers. The interface shall be programmable as to what

information is sent to it and shall include the ability to print out Detector Status by point, Event History by point and System Programming.

2.1.10 Distributed Power Module

The fire system shall be capable of supporting up to eight Power Modules that provide 5 additional amps of power each.

2.1.12 Digital Communicator

The digital communicator must be an integral part of the control panel and be capable of reporting all zones or points of alarm, supervisory, and trouble as well as all system status information such

as loss of AC, low battery, ground fault, loss of supervision to any remote devices with individual and distinct messages to a central station or remote station. The communicator must also be capable

of up/downloading of all system programming options, Event history and Sensitivity compliance

information to a PC on site. The communicator shall have an answering machine bypass feature that will allow the panel to respond to communication even on phone lines that have other

communication equipment present. The communicator must be capable of reporting via Contact ID formats to a BOSCH D6600 receiver. The communicator shall have a delayed AC loss report

function which will provide a programmable report delay plus a 10-25 min random component to

help ease traffic to the central station during a power outage.

2.1.13 IPDACT

Bosch IP DACTs for fire communications, will be provided and installed by Bosch Certified Installers currently working on Division 28 security/intrusion systems. This will include:

1. The UL installation of Bosch IP DACT

2. UL installation/connection of the IP DACT to the onsite FACP 3. Programming of the IP DACT

4. Programming of the Bosch D6600 receivers in the BVSD security office 5. Final connection/testing of the IP DACT to the BVSD provided telephone line and LAN

connection.

6. All wiring, hardware, rough in, parts and pieces needed to complete this installation will be completed through the Division 28 integrator

7. Parts for IP DACT to include: Bosch B465-MR-120WI and D127 Battery2

2 Added 01/27/2017

Page 113 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

2.1.15 Dry Contacts

The FACP will have three form "C" dry contacts, one will be dedicated to trouble conditions, the other two will be programmable for alarm, trouble, sprinkler supervisory, notification, pre-alarm,

water flow, manual pull, aux. 1 or aux. 2. The trouble contact shall be normal in an electrically

energized state so that any total power loss (AC and Backup) will cause a trouble condition. In the event that the Microprocessor on the FACP fails the trouble contacts shall also indicate a trouble

condition.

2.1.16 Ground Fault Detection

A ground fault detection circuit, to detect positive and negative grounds on all field wiring. The

ground fault detector shall operate the general trouble devices as specified but shall not cause an alarm to be sounded. Ground fault will not interfere with the normal operation, such as alarm, or

other trouble conditions.

2.1.17 Over current Protection

All low voltage circuits will be protected by microprocessor controlled power limiting or have self

-restoring polyswitches for the following: smoke detector power, main power supply, indicating appliance circuits, battery standby power and auxiliary output.

2.1.18 Test Functions

A "Lamp Test" mode shall be a standard feature of the fire alarm control panel and shall test all LED's and the LCD display on the main panel and remote annunciators.

A "Walk Test" mode shall be a standard feature of the fire alarm control panel. The walk test

feature shall function so that each alarm input tested will operate the associated notification

appliance for six seconds. The FACP will then automatically perform a reset and confirm normal device operation. The event memory shall contain the information on the point tested, the zone

tripped, the zone restore and the individual points return to normal.

A "Fire Drill" mode shall allow the manual testing of the fire alarm system notification circuits. The

"Fire Drill" shall be capable of being controlled at the main annunciator, remote annunciators and via a remote contact input.

A "Bypass Mode" shall allow for any point or nac circuit to be bypassed without effecting the

operation of the total fire system.

2.1.19 Remote Input Capabilities

The control panel shall have provisions for supervised switch inputs for the purpose of Alarm reset

and Alarm and trouble silence.

2.1.21 On board programmer

The FACP shall have an on board programmer which will allow for all system functions and options

to be programmed via the on board annunciator keypad. Any panel that does not have this capability will not be accepted.

Page 114 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

2.1.22 Downloading Software

The fire alarm control panel must support up/downloading of system programming from a PC under Windows or NT platforms. The FACP must also be able to download the detector sensitivity test

results and a 1000 event system event buffer to the PC. Communication shall take place over a

direct connection to the PC and/or via the same telephone lines as the built in digital communicator and shall not require an external modem to be connected to the panel. The downloading software

shall contain a code that will block unauthorized persons from accessing the panel via direct connection or over the phone lines.

2.1.22 English language descriptions

The FACP shall provide the ability to have a text description of each system device, input zone, and output group on the system. The use of individual lights to provide descriptions will not be

acceptable.

2.2 SYSTEM OPERATION

2.2.1 Alarm

When a device indicates an alarm or supervisory condition the control panel must respond within 3

seconds. The General Alarm or Supervisory Alarm LED on the annunciator(s) shall light and the LCD shall prompt the user as to the number of current events. All notification circuits associated

with the alarm or supervisory condition shall activate. If the digital dialer is being utilized it shall

transmit a signal to the digital alarm receiving unit. The alarm shall also cause the appropriate door holders and air handlers to shut down. If employed all elevators shall return to the main level or an

alternate level when required by the elevator specification or building code. The alarm information must be stored in event memory for later review. Event memory shall be available at the main and

all remote annunciators. The alarm memory must be capable of storing up to 1000 events.

When the alarmed device is restored to normal, the control panel shall be required to be manually

reset to clear the alarm condition, except that the alarms may be silenced as programmed. Exception: When detectors are utilized in single station or multi-station applications they may be self- restoring.

An alarm shall be silenced by a code or Firefighter key at the main or remote annunciators. When

silenced, this shall not prevent the resounding of subsequent events if another event should occur (subsequent alarm feature). When alarms are silenced the silenced LED on the control

panel, and on any remote annunciators shall remain lit, until the alarmed device is returned to normal.

2.2.2 Troubles

When a device indicates a trouble condition, the control panel System Trouble LED should light and the LCD should prompt the user as to the number of current events. The trouble information must

be stored in event memory for later review. Event memory must be available at the main and all

remote annunciators.

When the device in trouble is restored to normal, the control panel shall be automatically reset, the trouble restore information must be stored in event memory for later review. Event memory must

be available at the main and all remote annunciators. A trouble shall be silenced by a code or Firefighter key at the main or remote annunciators. When silenced, this shall not prevent the

Page 115 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

resounding of subsequent events if another event should occur.

2.2.3 Supervision Methods

Each SLC loop shall be electrically supervised for opens and ground faults in the circuit wiring, and

shall be so arranged that a fault condition on any loop will not cause an alarm to sound. Additionally, every addressable device connected to the SLC will be supervised and individually

identified if in a fault condition. The occurrence of any fault will light a trouble LED and sound the system trouble sounder, but will not interfere with the proper operation of any circuit which does not

have a fault condition.

SECTION THREE: SYSTEM COMPONENTS

3.1 System Cabinet 3.1.1 Mounting

The system cabinet shall be either surface or flush mounted. The cabinet door shall be easily removable to facilitate installation and service.

3.1.2 Audible System Trouble Sounder

An audible system trouble sounder shall be an integral part of the control unit. Provisions shall also

be provided for an optional supervised remote trouble signal.

3.2 Power Supply and Charger:

The entire system shall operate on 24 VDC, filtered switch mode power supply with the rated current

available of 5 Amps. The FACP must have a battery charging circuit capable of complying with the

following requirements:

Sixty (60) hours of battery standby with five (5) minutes of alarm signaling at the end of this sixty (60) hour period (as required per NFPA 72 remote station signaling requirements) using

rechargeable batteries with automatic charger to maintain standby gel-cell batteries in a fully

charged condition. (FOR VOICE DESIGNS) OR

Twenty-four (24) hours of battery standby with five (5) minutes of alarm signaling at the end of this twenty-four (24) hour period (as required per NFPA 72 central station signaling requirements) using

rechargeable batteries with automatic charger to maintain gel-cell batteries in a fully charged condition.

The power supply shall comply with UL Standard 864 for power limiting.

The FACP will indicate a trouble condition if there is a loss of AC power or if the batteries are missing or of insufficient capacity to support proper system operation in the event of AC failure. A "Battery

Test" will be performed automatically every minute to check the integrity of the batteries. The test

must disconnect the batteries from the charging circuit and place a load on the battery to verify the battery condition.

3.2.1 Connections and Circuits

Connections to the light and power service shall be on a dedicated branch circuit in accordance with

Page 116 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

the National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70, and the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).

The circuit and connections shall be mechanically protected and have a surge suppresser. This

includes SLC’s, 120 VAC, NAC circuits, telephone connections and/or IP-DACT connection.

A circuit disconnecting means shall be accessible only to authorized personnel and shall be clearly

marked "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL".

SECTION FOUR: ACCESSORY COMPONENTS

4.3 Manual Fire Alarm Stations

Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non-coded, break glass, double action type, with a key operated

test reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so designed that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal except by use of a key. The reset key shall be so

designed that it will reset the manual Pull Station and open the FACP cabinet without use of another

key. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to visually detected, as operated, at a minimum distance of fifty feet, front or side. Manual stations shall be constructed of die cast

metal with clearly visible operating instructions on the front of the station in raised letters. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching back box, or semi-flush mounting on a standard

single gang box, and shall be installed within the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) dependent on Manual Station accessibility or per local requirements. Manual Stations shall be

as listed below according to the proper manufacture. All manual fire stations must be labeled on the

outside of the device in so the address of the device can be seen without removing the device

4.5 Smoke Detectors

The Smoke detector shall have a flashing status LED for visual supervision. When the detector is

actuated, the flashing LED will latch on steady at full brilliance. The sensitivity of the detector shall be capable of being measured by the control panel without the need for external test apparatus.

Smoke detectors shall be as listed below according to the proper manufacture. All smoke detectors must be labeled on the outside of the device in so the address of the device can be seen without

removing the device.

4.6 Heat Detectors

The heat detector shall have a flashing status LED for visual supervision. When the detector is

actuated, the flashing LED will latch on steady at full brilliance. The detector may be reset by actuating the control panel's reset switch. The vandal security-locking feature shall be used in those

areas as indicated on the drawings. Electronics of the unit shall be shielded to protect against false

alarms from E.M.I. and R.F.I. Heat detectors shall be as listed below according to the proper manufacture. All heat detectors must be labeled on the outside of the device in so the address of the

device can be seen without removing the device

4.7 Duct Detectors

Duct detectors shall easily access. They shall have a remote test switch and remote LED below the

ceiling in visible sight within 4’ of the detector. The LED must be labeled on the outside on the face plate so the address can be seen without removing the device. Duct detector shall be as listed below

according to the proper manufacture.

Page 117 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

4.8 Horn/Strobes

Horn/Strobes shall have the candela rating visibly on the outside of the device. The horn/strobe must be label on the inside with the device’s panel and circuit number on it.

SECTION FIVE: WARRANTY AND FINAL TEST

5.1 General

The contractor shall warrant all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects in accordance with Section 1.4.4 from the date of final acceptance.

5.2 Final Test

Before the installation shall be considered completed and acceptable by the awarding authority, a test of the system shall be performed as follows:

The contractor's job foreman, a BVSD Fire Technician, and the fire department shall operate every building fire alarm device to ensure proper operation and correct annunciation at the control panel.

At least one half of all tests shall be performed on battery standby power.

Where application of heat would destroy any detector, it may be manually activated.

The communication loops and the indicating appliance circuits shall be opened in at least two (2) locations per circuit to check for the presence of correct supervision circuitry.

When the testing has been completed to the satisfaction of both the contractor's job foreman and

owner, a notarized letter cosigned by each attesting to the satisfactory completion of said testing

shall be forwarded to the owner and the fire department.

The contractor shall leave the fire alarm system in proper working order, and, without additional expense to the owner, shall replace any defective materials or equipment provided by him under

this contract within one year (365 days) from the date of final acceptance by the awarding authority.

Prior to final test the fire department must be notified in accordance with local requirements.

5.3 As Built Drawings, Testing, and Maintenance Instructions

5.3.1 As Built Drawings

A complete set of reproducible "as-built" drawings showing installed wiring, color coding, and wire tag notations for exact locations of all installed equipment, specific interconnections between all

equipment, and internal wiring of the equipment shall be delivered to the owner upon completion of system.

.3.2 Operating and Instruction Manuals

Operating and instruction manuals shall be submitted prior to testing of the system. Three (3) complete sets of operating and instruction manuals shall be delivered to the owner upon

completion. User operating instructions shall be provided prominently displayed on a separate sheet located next to the control unit in accordance with U.L. Standard 864.

Page 118 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

SECTION SIX: PARTS LISTS

6.1 Silent Knight parts list

5820 XL Main Control Panel

5815XL Signaling Line Circuit Expander (SLC) Module 5824 Printer Interface Module

5860 LCD Remote Annunciator 5880 LED I/O module

5895XL Intelligent Distributed Power Module 5.0 Amps 5496 Intelligent Distributed Power Module 6.0 Amps

SD505-APS Analog Photoelectric Smoke detector

SD505-AIS Analog Ionization Sensor SD505-AHS Analog Heat Sensor

SD505-ARM Addressable Relay Module SD505-ADH Duct Detector Enclosure

SD500-ARM Addressable Relay Module (replaces the SD505-ARM)

SD500-ANM Addressable Notification Module SD505-SDM Two Wire Smoke Detector Module

SD505-6IB Smoke Detector Isolation Base SD505-6SB Smoke Detector Sounder Base

SD505-6RB Smoke Detector Relay Base SD505-DUCT Duct Detector Housing with smoke detector

SD505-DUCT/R Duct Detector Housing with Built -In Relay w/smoke detector

SD505-DTS-K Remote Test Switch For Duct detector SD500-LED 80 Output LED Driver Board

SD500-PSDA Double Action Pull Station - Key Reset GES or GEC Series Combination Horn Strobe or Strobe only devices

SK-IP-2/2UD IP-Communicator kit.

6.2 Farenhyt parts list

IFP-100/1000 Main Control Panel

5815XL Signaling Line Circuit Expander (SLC) Module

5824 Printer Interface Module 5860 LCD Remote Annunciator

5880 LED I/O module RPS-1000 Intelligent Distributed Power Module 5.0 Amps

5496 Intelligent Distributed Power Module 6.0 Amps

IDP‐ACCLIMATE ADDRESSABLE MULTI PHOTOELEC SMOKE W THERMAL

IDP‐BEAM ADDRESSABLE BEAM SMOKE DETECT REFLCTD

IDP‐BEAM‐T ADDRESSABLE BEAM SMOKE DETCT REFLCTD W TST FEAT IDP‐CONTROLADDRESSABLE SUPERVISED CONTROL MODULE

IDP‐CONTROL‐6 ADDRESSABLE 6 CIRCUIT SUPERVISED CONTROL MODULE IDP‐FIRE‐CO

ADDRESSABLE FIRE & CO COMBINATION DETECTOR IDP‐HEAT ADDRESSABLE THERMAL DETECTOR FIXED TEMP 135

IDP‐HEAT‐HT ADDRESSABLE VARIABLE DETECTOR HIGH TEMP,135 DEG.F ‐ 190

IDP‐HEAT‐ROR ADDRESSABLE THRML DETC FIX TEMP RATE OF RISE 135

IDP‐ION ADDRESSABLE IONIZATION SMOKE DETECTOR

IDP‐ISO ADDRESSABLE LINE ISOLATOR MOD.

IDP‐MINIMON ADDRESSABLE MINI MONITOR MODULE,

IDP‐MONITOR ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE, SUPERVISED, SINGLE CONTACT

Page 119 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 01/27/2017 Department of Operational Services

IDP‐MONITOR‐10 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE, SUPERVISED, 10 POINTS

IDP‐MONITOR‐2 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE, W/2

INITIATING CIRCUITS

IDP‐PHOTO ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECT.

IDP‐PHOTOR INTELLIGENT PHOTOELECTRIC REPLACEMENT SMOKE DETECTOR WITH

REMOTE TEST CAPABILITY IN DUCT APPLICAIONS.

IDP‐PHOTO‐T ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECT. W/ THERMAL)

IDP‐PULL‐DA ADDRESSABLE PULL STATION, DUAL ACTION, KEY RESET

IDP‐RELAY ADDRESSABLE RELAY MODULE W/ 2 ISOLATED SETS OF

FORM C CONTACTS

IDP‐RELAY‐6 ADDRESSABLE RELAY MODULE W/ 6 FORM C RELAYS

IDP‐RELAYMON‐ 2 DUAL INPUT/DUAL OUTPUT MODULE

IDP‐ZONE ADDRESSABLE 2‐WIRE ZONE INTERFACE MODULE

IDP‐ZONE‐6 ADDRESSABLE 2‐WIRE ZONE INTERFACE W/ 6‐ZONE INPUTS

GES or GEC Series COMBINATION STROBES AND OR HORN/STROBES

SK-IP-2/2UD IP-COMMUNICATOR

VOICE EVACUATION

IFP‐100ECS IFP‐100 INTEGRATED WITH EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VIP‐TR TRIM RING FOR VIP PRODUCTS

ECS‐RCU ECS REMOTE COMMAND UNIT (REPLACES VIP‐RM)

ECS‐DUAL50W AMPLIFIER 50/100 WATT DUAL CHANNEL / BACK‐UP AMP

ECS‐50W AMPLIFIER, 50 WATT

ECS‐125W AMPLIFIER, 125 WATT

ECS‐50WBU BACK‐UP AMPLIFIER DAUGHTER BOARD FOR ECS‐DUAL50W ECS‐CE4 4

CIRCUIT EXPANDER FOR ECS‐50W OR ECS‐125W

ECS‐SW24 24 SWITCH EXPANDER FOR IFP‐100ECS, IFP‐1000ECS

ECS‐VCM REPLACEMENT VOICE CONTROL MODULE FOR IFP100ECS, IFP‐1000ECS

ECS‐RVM REPLACEMENT REMOTE VOICE MODULE FOR ECS-RCU or ECS‐RCU2000

ECS‐RPU REMOTE PAGING UNIT FOR IFP‐ECS CONTROL PANELS

END OF SECTION

Page 120 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

BUILDING SYSTEM CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 New schools and major remodel projects will use all direct digital controls. Controls in minor retrofits

will match the existing building controls. This section specifies materials and methods common to both.

1.02 The Controls Contractor shall be an authorized installer for Andover Controls Corporation who has

been in continuous business for at least five years.

1.03 Design a separate temperature control zone with its own thermostat or control sensor for each

student area or classroom.

1.04 Direct digital or electronic controls are limited at this time to Andover Controls Corporation. Any controls furnished with packaged equipment must be compatible with and able to interface with the

Andover system.

1.05 Minimum Design Requirements for Consultants:

A. Include the listed temperature control drawings among the final contract drawings and make them the same size and of the same sheet material as the other contract drawings no matter

what their source, consultant or installing contractor. The mechanical engineer, not the controls contractor, is responsible to see that control drawings meet this standard.

1. Floor and roof plans showing thermostat and equipment locations. 2. Require point-to-point connection diagrams for wiring and pneumatic tubing from the

Controls Contractor. 3. Schematic instrumentation and control flow diagram labeled accurately and showing the

interrelationship of all controls and the areas and equipment served.

4. Show the detailed sequence of operation on the contract documents. The bill of materials shall appear on the Control Contractor's drawings.

B. Comply with the latest edition of ASHRAE Standard 62. C. Divisions 15 and 16 requirements apply.

1.06 WORK INCLUDED A. Design Documents (noted above).

B. Preassembled Control Panels. C. Interface with existing controls panels in the buildings. System is Andover Continuum.

D. On-site microprocessor, Ethernet connection to WAN and software if applicable. E. Actuators, thermostats, sensors, thermowells, instrument air compressors, filter/dryers, gages

and mounting hardware as applicable.

F. Control valves, dampers, linkages and mounting hardware. G. Construction supervision.

H. Demonstration and training. I. Warranty – Provide two year warranty of the entire system.

1.07 SUBMITTALS (include in the O&M Manual) A. Shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and/or printouts for:

1. Sensors. 2. Controllers and setpoint limits.

3. Automatic control valve and dampers. 4. Thermostats.

5. Thermometers and indicators.

Page 121 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

6. Gauges. 7. System diagrams.

8. Point to point wiring or tubing diagrams. 9. Control panels and panel layout.

10. Instrument air compressors, regulators, blow down valves and dryers.

11. Installation and calibration instructions. 12. Software programs and sequences written in the program language and in English.

13. Computers, printers, modems and related hardware.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 CONTROL VALVES

A. Flanged cast iron in sizes 2-1/2" and larger, otherwise bronze. Seat and inner valve material of hardened steel. Sizes 2" and smaller with soldered or threaded connections.

B. Spring return to the normal position in the absence of control power, that is, fail with the heating valves open and the cooling valves closed.

C. Modulating magnetic or electric actuators with adjustable end switches to prevent

overstroking are acceptable in sizes <1". Use pneumatic actuators for larger sizes. In remodel projects where no instrument air compressor exists, consult the District.

D. Use a three-way design at the ends of long runs to keep piping near the service temperature and maintaining pump flow above 25% of design. Otherwise use two-way valves.

E. Size for a 5 PSI maximum drop.

2.02 DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Modulating in most applications or two-position in rare cases; i.e., minimum outside air dampers or exhaust dampers.

B. Provide position indication or verification on the outside air, return air and exhaust air dampers of air handling units larger than 15,000 cfm. An example is an analog input to the

DDC panel from an actuator potentiometer.

C. Provide at least one operator for each 16 square feet of damper, or for each length greater than 48".

D. Modulating magnetic or electric actuators with adjustable end switches to prevent overstroking are acceptable in small dampers associated with unitary equipment like exhaust

fans. Consult the District if exceptions are desired or in remodel projects where no instrument

air compressor exists. E. 4-20 mA, 24 vac or 0-20 vdc for electric, 3 to 15 psi with the proper spring range for

pneumatic actuators. Do not use 24 vdc if the actuator position has to be reported. F. Spring return to the fire alarm position upon power failure.

G. Cast aluminum body, not sheet metal for pneumatic actuators. H. VAV box actuators: capable of permanent stall operation without damage. Adjustable stop

pins for stroke limits. Drive gears of nickel steel, no plastic.

2.03 INDICATORS A. Interface each indicator with remote sensor/controller to display measured value.

B. Supply selector switches for multiple indicators that show which variable is being measured.

C. Accurate and repeatable to ±0.5% of the measured variable's maximum value. D. Electromechanical device or panel mounted back screen display.

E. Indicators are not required for values that can be reported by the DDC system.

2.04 TRANSDUCERS A. Electronic/pneumatic transducer: Accuracy ±1% of maximum value.

B. Fully adjustable (not fixed) range.

Page 122 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

2.05 SENSORS

A. Temperature: Thermistor or platinum RTD, Accuracy ±1°F. Do not use RTDs that require transmitters.

B. Differential Building Static pressure: vary output voltage linearly. Range: -0.1 to 0.1" W.C.

with an accuracy of 2% of its range, repeatable to 0.5% of range. C. Duct static pressure: vary output linearly. Range -1 to +4" W.C., accuracy 3% of range,

repeatable within 1.5% of range. D. Air velocity: linear indication of the velocity of air in a duct from 0 to 2000 FPM, Accuracy, ±50

FPM from which the central controller can calculate CFM. E. Outdoor air temperature: high resistance change versus temperature change, designed for

outdoor mounting insulated from the building and out of the sun, minimum range –20 to

+110°F, accuracy ±1°F, repeatable within 1/2°F. F. Room temperature: minimum range 50°F to 95°F, accuracy ±1°F, repeatable 1.5% of range.

G. Duct temperature: minimum range 32°F to 110°F, accuracy ± 1°F, repeatable 1.5% of range. Use averaging elements, not bulbs.

H. Liquid temperature: insert in a pipe well and immerse in a substance designed to enhance

heat transfer and rapid response. Minimum range 35°F to 220°F, 1% accuracy, repeatable within 1% of range.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Smoke detectors (supplied by Division 16). B. Freeze Detection Thermostats (Freeze Stats):

1. Line voltage liquid-filled type responsive only to the lowest temperature sensed along any

one foot length of its element. 2. Adjustable.

3. Manual reset. C. Plastic laminate labels on all panels and major field devices screwed or riveted to the panel

faces, no adhesives. Do not attach labels to replaceable devices or room thermostats or

sensors. The definition of major is left to the consultant. D. Flow Switches:

a. Pressure differential type with SPDT contacts. Do not use paddle switches except where required to maintain a chiller or boiler warranty or where other devices would not work

reliably. If in doubt, check with the District. The consulting engineer must include on the

drawings a detail of paddle switch installation, if they are used, and assure that the contractor installs them properly. Use McDonnell-Miller FS4-3 or approved equal.

b. Design an excessive water make-up alarm to alert the maintenance people in of too much makeup water flowing into a closed heating or cooling loop and thus indicating a major

leak. In systems with a glycol feeder this may be no more than a low level alarm in the glycol tank. In systems that lack a feeder design a DP switch across the backflow

preventer or the makeup solenoid valve that will trip with water flow. Add a time delay

relay adjustable from 30 to 120 seconds to prevent nuisance alarms. c. Use current switches to prove fan or low head pump flow where appropriate.

F. Wind dampening "weatherhead" on each atmospheric pressure sensing point; e.g., Dwyer A-306. Locate above wind eddies caused by the building structure and roof equipment.

G. Shielded cable on critical communication and sensor lines as recommended by the

manufacturer or advised by the consultant. H. For after-hours operations provide a building touchpad that will override the programmed

sequence and permit selected equipment to operate in the occupied mode for programmable temporary interval, typically three hours. The electric power demand limiting program takes

precedence over any override. Locate the building touchpad in the office area Coordinate exact location with Project Manager.

I. Generally use blank stainless steel wall plate for mounting of room sensors to prevent

Page 123 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

tampering. Sensors shall be mounted on interior walls, installed with necessary insulation from wall.

J. Use DP switches across fans as fan status input points into the DDC panel. K. In buildings with control air compressors, provide a 24 hour blow down timer on the receiver

tank positioned to automatically open a solenoid valve for an adjustable 4 to 30 seconds once

a day.

PART 3 – INSTALLATION

3.01 The Controls Contractor is responsible for preassembling and installing panels and all hardware with his own employees, proving the system and training District people in its proper function and

maintenance.

3.02 Wiring, conduit placement and the installing of actuators and related linkage may be subcontracted to

a District approved installer but in this case the controls contractor shall label and connect all wiring terminations and be responsible for the subcontractor's work.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. 12 hours at each elementary or 18 hours at each middle or high school to demonstrate the

controls to District personnel and answer questions. B. Optionally 24 hours minimum of formal classroom training to selected District personnel in the

theory, function and application of each hardware and software element and each component in the control system, plus 8 hours of telephone consultation.

C. The consultant shall confer with the District at the time of design to determine how much training

will be required by the construction documents.

3.04 Plenum rated cable inside of plenums. Wiring suspended neatly from the overhead structure. Do not support on top of ceiling tiles. Minimum wire size, 18 AWG stranded.

3.05 Number or color code wiring terminals and provide a cross reference to the drawings to ease later checkout and diagnosis.

3.06 Place exposed control wiring in conduit with proper identification.

3.07 SENSORS A. Install liquid temperature sensors inside of pipe wells with an appropriate heat transfer

compound inside the well.

3.08 ACCESSIBILITY A. Install all control devices in "Readily Accessible" locations as defined by Chapter 1, Article 100,

Part A of the 1993 National Electrical Code.

END OF SECTION

Page 124 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

SECTION 15985 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 Design the control system to implement the sequence described below verbatim for each piece of

equipment as applicable. Not all described sequences will be applicable on a specific project and those should be omitted from the construction documents.

A. Air Handling Units. B. VAV Boxes.

C. DX Units.

D. Boilers and related pumps. E. Chiller and related pumps.

F. Cooling Tower and related pumps. G. Terminal in-duct heating coils.

H. Electrical demand limiting. I. Exhaust Fans and Miscellaneous.

1.02 Operate mechanical ventilation and comfort cooling equipment only during occupied hours.

1.03 Setback heating temperatures to 60°F (adjustable) nights, weekends and holidays.

1.04 Loss of power to the DDC panel shall automatically enable the heating plant and disable the cooling

plant.

1.05 Heating devices shall always fail toward heating so that the building is never without heat due to a controls failure.

1.06 To minimize electrical demand spikes sequence the restarts of major equipment following a fire alarm

shut down.

PART 2 – SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

2.01 EACH AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Program Occupied/Unoccupied times and provide override from building touchpad initially timed

for 3 hours in the software. Electrical demand limiting routines take precedence ahead of override devices.

B. Smoke detectors in the supply and return air streams stop fans and close outside air and relief dampers by direct wired interlocks manually reset, not through DDC software.

C. Occupied Mode:

1. Supply fan on continuously. Keep the OAD closed for five minutes (adjustable), following the initial fan start to stabilize the air temperature inside the AHU. In an AHU left overly warm by

morning warmup, this procedure is to prevent the MAT controller from overcompensating, opening the OAD too far and tripping the freeze stat.

2. Open all boxes to primary air prior to starting the fan. 3. In VAV systems if the building is in HEATING.MODE, close the cooling coil valve, if any, and

modulate the heating coil valve to maintain a discharge air temperature according to this

adjustable reset schedule based on the average room temperature. Average Room Temperature DAT Reset Calculation

RESET.CALC(DASP, AVG.T, 80, 55, HEAT.SP + 4, HEAT.SP - 4) 4. Close the cooling coil valve, if any, if the building is in HEATING.MODE.

5. In VAV systems if the building is in COOLING.MODE, close the preheat coil valve, if any, and

modulate the cooling coil valve to maintain a discharge air temperature according to this adjustable reset schedule based on the average room temperature.

Page 125 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

6. Average Room Temperature DAT Reset Calculation 7. RESET.CALC(DASP, AVG.T, 75, 55, COOL.SP, COOL.SP - 4)

8. For VAV systems modulate the outdoor air dampers to maintain a mixed air temperature according to the below adjustable reset schedule based on the Discharge Air Setpoint. If

required the mixed air temperature could also be reset based on the signal to the variable

frequency drive or on the supply duct pressure.

MAT Setpoint Calculation Set MASP = DASP - 5 If MASP > 70 then Set MASP to 70 If MASP < 55 then Set MASP to 55

9. For constant volume systems modulate the outdoor air dampers and heating and cooling coil valves in sequence to maintain a discharge air temperature according to the below adjustable

reset schedule based on the average room temperatures. The average should not include

rooms with supplementary cooling such as computer rooms. Ave. Room Temperature DAT RESET.CALC(DASP, AVG.T, 80, 55, HEAT.SP + 4, HEAT.SP - 4) RESET.CALC(DASP, AVG.T, 75, 55, COOL.SP, COOL.SP - 4)

10. In air conditioned buildings close the outdoor air dampers to their minimum position when

the outdoor air temperature rises above an adjustable value of 75°F. If the building is not air conditioned, set the damper high lockout to 80°F in the SETUP line of the program. If in

COOLING.MODE and the outdoor air dampers are open 100% and the Mixed air temperature

rises above the average room temperature or the space temperature and 10 minutes passes set the damper high lockout equal to the outside air temperature minus 1. The outdoor air

dampers will then be set to their minimum position. It is understood that occupied zone temperatures will rise above comfort levels.

11. Modulate relief dampers to maintain 0.05" WC building pressure.

12. Enable (not start) each return fan as the initial part of the supply fan start sequence. Delay each supply fan start 5 seconds after enabling the corresponding return fan.

13. Turn on a return or relief fan when the corresponding damper, either return or relief, opens to 100% and the building pressure is still above setpoint.

14. Keep the return fan off if the corresponding supply fan is off. 15. Supply duct static pressure sensor and controller:

a. Located 2/3 the distance of that duct's longest run.

b. Modulate the variable frequency drive of the supply fan. c. Adjustable and remotely readable in 1/10" increments.

16. Initially set the outdoor air damper minimum position selector to deliver 15 CFM per person unless a separate minimum outside air damper has been included in the design.

17. Drain the evaporative cooling sump, if any, below 40°F and fill the sump above 58°F outside

air temperature (Adjustable). 18. Interlock the evaporative pump, if any, to run only when the sump is full, its respective air

handling unit is in the occupied mode, the outdoor air temperature is favorable, the supply fan is on, the return air damper is closed and the outdoor air damper full open.

19. Start the chilled water coil pump, if any, when the outdoor air temperature falls below 38°F and stop the pump if the OAT rises above 40°F.

20. Run the heating coil pump, if any, whenever the boiler plant operates, whether the building

is occupied or not. 21. Design the outdoor air, return air and exhaust/relief air dampers as separate DDC points in

major air handling units. The definition of major is left to the consultant. D. Unoccupied Mode:

1. Supply, return and exhaust fans normally off.

2. Evaporative cooling system, if any, off. 3. Outdoor and relief air dampers closed.

4. Heating valves full open (run wild). 5. Cooling valves closed to the cooling coil.

Page 126 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

6. VAV boxes in the night setback mode. 7. Return air dampers open.

8. Start the supply fan when the coldest room falls below the night setback temperature. Stop the fan when that temperature rises 3°F above the setback temperature.

9. Lock out mechanical cooling.

10. Start the chilled water coil pump, if any, if the outdoor air temperature drops Below an adjustable 38°F. Stop the pump if the OAT rises above 40°F.

E. Morning Warm Up: 1. Start morning warm up according to the district supplied program.

a. If the air handling unit does not supply fan powered boxes start the supply fan; keep outdoor and relief dampers closed and return dampers open.

b. Lock out mechanical cooling.

c. Modulate the heating valve to maintain an adjustable 85°F discharge air temperature.

d. Set VAV boxes or fan powered boxes, if any, to the warm up mode. F. Start morning purge according to the district supplied program:

1. The average room temperature exceeds 72°F.

a. Lock out mechanical cooling. b. Start the supply and return fans and enable the relief fans.

c. Modulate the economizer dampers to deliver supply air at 55°F. d. Continue purge until the average room temperature falls below 69°F, then return to

the occupied mode. G. Low Temperature (Freeze Stat) Trip:

1. Hard wire the freeze stat to the required relays and other devices. Do not use DDC software.

require a manual reset so that the trouble must be investigated. 2. Stop any fans inside the air-handling unit.

3. Start coil circulating pumps, if any. 4. Open the heating valve toward heat.

5. If the cooling coil has a circulator pump, close the cooling valve toward the cooling system.

Otherwise open the valve toward the cooling system. 6. Alarm as specified later in this section.

2.02 HEATING PLANT

A. Start heating water pumps when HEATING.MODE is On .

B. Use a differential pressure switch to automatically turn on the lag pump if the lead pump fails. C. Interlock boilers to be off if the main heating water pumps are off for any reason. Shut off any

one boiler if its respective circulator is off for any reason. D. Provide a water temperature sensor located in the heating water pump discharge line and a PI

mode controller to stage the boilers and circulator pumps one by one with first on being first off. Change the sequence with each start so as to age the boilers evenly.

E. Linearly reset the heating water temperature according to this adjustable schedule:

For Non-Condensing Boilers OA Temperature HW Temperature

60°F 140° F (minimum) 0° F 190° F (maximum)

F. Hold each boiler circulator pump on for an adjustable 60 seconds after flame shut down.

2.03 CHILLER

A. The chiller will have its own control panel and start routines, which include the start and prove procedures for the chilled and condenser water pumps. Provide the necessary relay(s) and devices

to enable or disable the chilled water plant, connect to the chiller's unloading mechanism in order to subject the equipment to demand limiting as described below, and schedule starts and stops at

programmable times. The chilled water plant schedule shall be changeable from the central DDC

Page 127 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

controller or a remote PC via WAN. B. Enable the cooling plant when the outside air temperature rises to 59°F (adjustable), and lock it

out when the outside air temperature drops below 55°F.

2.04 COOLING TOWER

A. The condenser water pumps are controlled from the chiller panel. B. Furnish and install a temperature sensor in the cold water basin to provide a data point and an

input to the central DDC controller. C. After the chiller start sequence has begun, maintain the condenser water temperature in the

adjustable range of 63° to 73°F by cycling the tower fan from off to low speed to high speed. Supply the tower fan with a time delay between high and low speed selections. Initially set to ten

seconds and experiment until experience reveals an optimal setting. Enter this setting in the O&M

manual. If more than one fan is supplied, stage the fans through six steps to achieve optimal temperature control. Stop the tower whenever the chiller stops unless tower cooling has been

designed into the sequence. Actual condenser water temperature and the setpoint range shall be readable and adjustable points from the central controller or a remote PC via the WAN.

2.05 UNIT HEATERS

A. These heaters may be run "wild," i.e., without heating control valves, only if mounted on or above he ceiling. But if supplied with a valve, open the valve and cycle the fan to maintain an adjustable

67 ±2°F space temperature. Interlock the fan with an aquastat in the heating water pipe so that the fan operates only when water above the stat temperature is flowing.

2.06 CABINET UNIT HEATERS (Usually at Entranceways) A. Open the heating valve and cycle the fan to maintain an adjustable 65 ±2°F space temperature.

Interlock the fan with an aquastat in the heating water pipe so that the fan operates only when water above the stat temperature is flowing.

2.07 POTABLE HOT WATER A. Run the circulating pump during occupied periods; The circulating pumps shall be off during the

hours of 9:00 PM to 3:00 AM.. Provide an override-timed switch. Circulating pumps should run when outside air temperatures are below 40°F regardless of schedule and can follow the

schedule when outside air temperatures rise above 45°F.

2.08 KITCHEN EXHAUST/TOILET EXHAUST

A. Operate each DDC control led exhaust fan from a hand-off-auto switch with the "auto" position interlocked with a time switch and the supply fan for that area.

B. Interlock each VAV box serving these areas to provide a minimum relief air under the following conditions:

1. If one kitchen exhaust fan is on, provide 80% CFM minimum thru the VAV box.

2. If more than one kitchen exhaust fan is on, provide 80% CFM minimum thru the VAV box.

C. Toilet exhaust fans will all be controlled on the occupancy schedule by DDC. D. If the kitchen lacks its own dedicated makeup air unit, modify the control sequence of the

air-handling unit that supplies the kitchen so that building pressure does not become

negative. The consultant must design a sequence with the required devices to accomplish this.

Page 128 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

2.9 FAN POWERED VAV BOX A. Program for occupied/unoccupied and warm-up modes.

B. Modulate the primary air damper to provide the required air volume to each room to maintain setpoint.

C. Modulate to minimum on a drop in load below the cooling setpoint.

D. Keep the box fan off during the cooling mode unless CFM is 25% less than CFM set point. E. Occupied Heating Mode:

1. Modulate heating water valve. 2. Run the fan continuously with primary air supplying the minimum ventilation requirement.

F. Unoccupied Mode: 1. Close the primary air damper. Turn fan off. If the room temperature drops below the night

setback temperature, turn the fan on and modulate the heating valve.

2.10 COOLING-ONLY VAV BOX

A. Same as the fan powered box control except when there is no call for cooling the box shall remain at its minimum volume setting. (Also see Warm Up Mode below.)

2.11 VAV BOX WARM UP A. Fan Powered VAV boxes will not use air handler for warmup. VAV dampers will goto the fully

closed position the VAV fan will be used to provide air and the VAV heating valve will be used to provide heat. When the space reaches its temperature set point the fan powered box should go

back to unoccupied mode. B. VAV box dampers, cooling-only boxes, shall open to their maximum volume setpoints and the local

VAV box heating coil valves shall close. The air-handling units shall supply heated supply air. If the

air-handling units do not have heat coils, heat shall have to come from the VAV box coils . C. Each VAV box air damper shall close to its minimum position when the respective room reaches its

occupied heating setpoint and the box shall remain at minimum position until the respective air handling unit goes to the occupied mode.

D. Each air handling unit heating valve shall modulate to maintain a return plenum temperature of

E. 70°F or an average room temperature of 70°F. Locate each plenum temperature sensor close to its respective air handling unit return air intake.

2.12 DX AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

A. Defined as unitary packaged equipment each with an integral or separate dedicated condensing

unit, and not part of an air-handling unit cooled with a central chiller. If there are only one or two of these in the building serving areas defined for specific purposes, eg, computer room or

administration area, apply the sequence described below. If these are in general use in the building, apply the sequence described above for air handling units.

B. Be able to unload the condensing units in two or more stages in response to changing cooling loads or demand limiting commands.

C. Reset the supply air temperature based on the average room temperature.

D. Use temperature data points in spaces served by packaged equipment to control related equipment only or as read-only values available to the central DDC panel.

2.14 UNIT VENTILATORS - Use ASHRAE Cycle II circulate heating hot water through coils during

unoccupied periods.

2.15 CONSTANT VOLUME TERMINAL IN-DUCT HEATING (or cooling) COILS A. At occupied times modulate the control valve to maintain space temperature within 2°F of

occupied setpoint. B. At unoccupied times keep the control valve closed to the coil unless there is a call for heat, then

modulate the valve to maintain the space within 2°F of the setback temperature. Keep valve open

Page 129 of 174

Technical Guide for Facility Design Boulder Valley School District Last Section Update: 13 March 15 Department of Operational Services

if the AHU fan is off and outside air temperature is below 40. Valve may close again when outside air rises above 45°F.

2.16 ALARMS

A. Program alarm points as shown below to call a designated monitoring station in BVSD Security at the Education Center as determined by the District’s Maintenance Department.

B. Boiler Supply Temperature Alarms: 1. DDC Parameters: Low < 100 deg (if boilers enabled)

Hi > 220 deg 30-minute delay A. Boiler Pump Alarms:

1. DDC Parameters: Command On & Status Off 15-minute delay

B. Command Off & Status On 15-minute delay C. Control Air Alarms:

1. DDC Parameters: 1-hour delay D. Freezer Alarms:

1. DDC Parameters: Low < –20 deg

E. Hi > 32 deg 2-hour delay F. Cooler Alarms:

1. DDC Parameters: Low < 32 deg Hi > 55 deg 2-hour delay

G. Freezestat Alarms: 1. DDC Parameters: 1-hour delay

H. Space Temperature Alarms:

1. DDC Parameters: Low <45 deg Hi > 100 deg 2-hour delay

I. Chilled Water Supply Temperature Alarms: 1. DDC Parameters: Low < 35 deg

Hi > 60 deg (if chiller enabled) 15-minute delay

J. Chilled Water Pump Alarms: 1. DDC Parameters: Command On & Status Off 15-minute delay

Command Off & Status On 15-minute delay K. Chiller Safety Alarms:

1. DDC Parameters: 15-minute delay

L. Communication Failures or Inactive Panels: 1. DDC Parameters: 15-minute delay

2.17 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. These are usually supplied and wired to the fire alarm panel by Division 16. Division 15 responsibility is limited to installing devices that will shut down HVAC equipment and close or

open appropriate dampers. The consulting engineer is required to coordinate with electrical

and other engineers and assure that this function does not escape the construction documents and that the trip sequence meets NFPA requirements.

END OF SECTION

Page 130 of 174

BVSD Approved IT Wiring Contractors January 2017 Barbara Kawczynski, Director of Sales

Interface Communications (Certified Commscope Uniprise/SystiMax) 4909 Nautilus Court North Suite 201 Boulder, CO 80301 (720) 684-4179 barbk@interface.cc

Jim Daniels, Installation Manager

H&H Data Services (Certified Commscope Uniprise) 1243 Sherman Drive Unit 6 Longmont, CO 80501 (970) 556-0697 jimmy@hhdataservices.com

Marty Cederstrom, President

C-Comm LLC (Certified Commscope Uniprise) PO Box 2365 Littleton, CO 80161 Office: (303) 221-1228 Cell: (303) 478-7858 mcederstrom@c-comm.com

Gerry Adams

Piper Communications (Certified Commscope Uniprise) 5960 Jay Street Arvada, CO 80003 (970) 231-4335 gerry@pipercommunications.com

Steven Gage

Precision Fiber Optics, Inc 304 Stevens Circle South Erie, CO 80516 (303) 661-0977 o (303) 588-4050 c pfoptics@comcast.net

Dan Wharton ,VP

Mountain States Data Tel Inc 5770 Clarkson St, Unit B Denver, CO 80216 (303) 255-8383 dan@msdtonline.com

Lowell Herman Source Communications 2260 Industrial Lane Broomfield, CO 80020 303.466.8925 x12 lowellh@source-communications.com

Page 131 of 174

BOULDER VALLEY SCHOOL DISTRICT

IT SHORT SPECIFICATIONS

January 2017 See BVSD Technology Guideline Section 27 document for complete details

1 1/25/17 as/dh/tr/mh/lf

BVSD Quick Specs

The Boulder Valley School District, Division of Information Technology, has drafted this “Quick Spec” to assist vendors in

the provision of accurate quotes using specific standards for work to be performed within Boulder Valley schools. No

quantities are outlined in the Specifications and Standards section; however, specific hardware has been defined for use

and must be followed by any vendor including replacement parts (at vendor expense) if found sub par items are found in

Boulder Valley schools. Vendors must detail quantity, type, color and model of all items to be installed, including locations.

All Data cables shall be Commscope 10G4 Cat6A. Specific wall installation requires two (2) Data cables per location

(roughly teaching wall, Exemplar sites have this in two locations) with BLUE jacks, and a blank in the upper right position

on the faceplate, unless otherwise stated in writing. One (1) cable behind TV location. All ceiling installations for WAP’s

shall be two (2) CAT6A data wires, terminated with an RJ-45 jack routed through the conduit in the ceiling, unless

otherwise stated in writing centered within each room and strategically in hallways and other spaces. All installations for

Security Camera’s shall be at minimum one (1) CAT6 cabling (exact quantity will be determined after their RFP due late

Winter/Early Spring 2016). All quotes must delineate each location, if said location, requires specific use of hardware

outside Boulder Valley School District specifications and standards. All new buildings, complete demolition and/or

MDF/IDF closet moves will require all cables replaced by one of the four Certified Uniprise Installers for the 20-year

warranty (listed in the Approved IT Wiring Contractor document). ** Intercom System ONLY will be Cat 5e, Commscope

5504M Gray cable color. *** Security Systems ONLY will be Cat 6, Commscope 4763404/10 | 7504 Green cable color

with Green stripe. **** HVAC control wire is Orange.

Patch cable colors: YELLOW - Data/Voice (Cat6A), GRAY - Printers (Cat6A), PURPLE - WAPS (Cat6A), WHITE - Facilities (Cat6A), RED - Fire System

(Cat6A), GREEN - Security (Cat6), ORANGE - Intercom (Cat5e), BLACK - IT Mgmt (Cat6A) and BLUE - Video (Cat6A)

Environmental Issues

BVSD Environmental Services - Asbestos removal will need to be contacted at a minimum of 7 days prior to work starting at site

to verify any site issues with asbestos. The numbers to contact them are Jim Clemmer (asbestos) at 720-561-6077 or Jane

Blanchard (Maintenance/Operations Help Desk) at 720-561-5143.

Division of Information Technology Closet/Data Drop Specification and Standards Commscope 8765404/10 | 10G4 Cat6A plenum cable, Blue cable color (data and voice) – All Cabling, except

Security & Intercom Commscope 4763404/10 | 7504 Cat6 plenum cable, Green cable color (Security System ONLY) Commscope 4197314/10 | 5504M Cat5e plenum cable, Gray cable color (Intercom System ONLY) Uniprise UNJ500OR Cat5e Orange angled jacks for Intercom Uniprise UNP-U-510-1U-24 Cat5e 24 Port Patch Panel Uniprise UNP-U-510-2U-48 Cat5e 48 Port Patch Panel Uniprise 760149930 | UNJ10G-BL Cat6A Blue jacks for all installs Uniprise CC0020883/1 | UNJ600-GR Cat6 Green jacks for all installs (Security ONLY) Uniprise M14L-262 4 port White faceplates (or smaller ports for TV or larger if needed) Uniprise 760162800 | UNP-U-10G-1U-24 Cat6A 24 Port Patch Panel Uniprise 760162818 | UNP-U-10G-2U-48 Cat6A 48 Port Patch Panel Uniprise CC0057604/1 | UNP610-48P Cat6 48 Port Patch Panel (Security ONLY) Siemon WM-143-5 (1U) Horizontal Wire Management Siemon WM-144-5 (2U) shallow Horizontal Wire Management Uniprise UN-110-WB-100PR 110 punch block (for Consolidation Points Only) CPI 11729-703 Vertical wire management 7ft double-sided Black CPI 55053-703 Black 7ft relay Rack CPI – Size TBD based on cable count Black Ladder Rack Patch cords 5e are from purchased from CxTec. Cat6 & Cat6A shall be COMMSCOPE

branded cables ONLY.

Page 132 of 174

BOULDER VALLEY SCHOOL DISTRICT

IT SHORT SPECIFICATIONS

January 2017 See BVSD Technology Guideline Section 27 document for complete details

2 1/25/17 as/dh/tr/mh/lf

Hallway pathways shall be cable trays with room for 25% future expansion.

All conduit pathways from the hallways to rooms must have enough extra room to add at least 10% extra cable for future expansion.

Data/voice cables will be suspended above the ceiling in accordance with TIA/IEEE standards and what’s required to meet Manufacturer requirements.

All old Cat3 cable shall be removed from site, coordinated with IT on what can be removed (older sites where cable is being replaced).

All cables shall be terminated on patch panels in the closet(s).

Jacks will be located at standard electrical height, unless prohibited by location (e.g., offices with built-in desks, then they will be installed above desk height). Desk level jacks will be appropriate in these cases only.

Data jacks in the ceilings for WAP’s shall be terminated with RJ45 ends and have a15 foot coil of spare cable unless maximum cable distance is reached.

Voice will be the first jack in sequence on the patch panel.

Jacks/faceplates will be placed to accommodate more cables where needed.

Labeling: Circuit labels in rooms will include Closet – Panel – Circuit Number (example: AB13, A Closet, Panel B, Port 13). Closet patch panel labels will be room number only. In addition to the wall port and patch panel labeling, all cables will be permanently labeled with appropriate cable number within twelve to eighteen inches from each end of the cable including fiber. Please add a lower case “i” in front of the room numbers/location on the patch panels to identify INTERCOM connections (ex i303 or iGym). Please add a lower case “w” in front of the room numbers/location on the patch panels to identify WAP (Wireless Access Points) connections (ex w303 or wGym). Also add a lower case “c” in front of the room numbers/location on the patch panels to identify Security Camera’s. Wireless Access Point’s require two CAT6A data cable(s) for each AP location and need to be 280 ft. or less; we will be running Power over Ethernet (POE) to the AP’s. Leave 20’ spooled in the ceiling, unless cable is exposed on hard ceiling. Closets will be a minimum of 10’ X 12’ for Elementary; 12’ x 12’ for Middle; and 12’ x 15’ for High Schools – with walls covered with ¾” fire rated plywood (not painted), and must be coordinated with IT personnel for exact room layout. All closets will have minimum of two standard 19” x 7’ CPI network racks with vertical management on both sides and in between racks. One rack will remain empty on the top half for fiber and systems equipment to be determined by the IT department. If vertical wire management does not exist on a rack, bid will include vertical wire management to both sides of the rack. Racks will be a standard minimum of 36 inches, our requirement is minimum 48” from both walls (front and back). Between closets: Fiber (Commscope LazrSPEED 550 (OM4) shall be used) from the MDF to each IDF to allow for 10GB to each closet. Cat5e 25 pair Plenum Cable terminated on patch panel on both ends. All new fiber installs will be in a rack mount box. If rack mount box cannot be used (should only be for portables), then with BVSD IT approval a standard wall mount box will suffice. All fiber to be terminated LC. Fiber will be Plenum rated and armored. When installing new rack and patch panels, they will be collated as follows, starting from top down for the second rack, 1st rack will be slightly modified due to top half being open for IT core and Fiber (See attached diagram): Note: For every patch panel added, two horizontal wire managements must be added.

QUESTIONS: Please contact IT Personnel at any time. Our Service Desk can be reached at 720-561-HELP (4357) from 7:30am to 4:30pm and

can assist in tracking someone down to assist with questions. Bond PM’s also have our contact information. Power layout is on ladder

racks, dedicated 20A (single gang box) per rack installed, plus several around perimeter of room, minimum 1 per wall. Also at minimum the

Rack power shall be tied back to ATS for connection to building generator (to be installed at each school over the next several years).

** Rack layout may change in Dec. 2016 once a new network hardware vendor is chosen. **

Page 133 of 174

BOULDER VALLEY SCHOOL DISTRICT

IT SHORT SPECIFICATIONS

January 2017 See BVSD Technology Guideline Section 27 document for complete details

3 1/25/17 as/dh/tr/mh/lf

Total Port Count (144) Total Port Count (240)

45

44 1st Rack installed

43 closest to wall. With E

42 wire manage against

41 wall 1st then rack.

40

39 Questions please

38 contact BVSD IT

37 personal. F

36

35

34

33

32

31

30 G

29

28

27 A

26

25

24

23 H

22

21 B

20

19

18

17

16 I

15

14 C

13

12

11

10

9 J

8

7 D

6

5

4

3

2

1 rev. 3/16/16

Ladder rack area: a dedicated 20A (single gang) circuit above each rack attached to side of ladder rack

2U UPS

2U UPS

1U Fiber LAN FTP to "B"

2U Wiremanager

48p Switch

2U Wiremanager

48p PatchPanel

24p PatchPanel

2U Wiremanager

24p Core/Dis tribution Switch

2U Wiremanager

25 Pair Copper to "B"

2U Wiremanager

48p Switch

2U Wiremanager

2U Wiremanager

Analog to Digital

Phone Gateway

48p PatchPanel

2U Wiremanager

2U Wiremanager

48p Switch

2U Wiremanager

48p PatchPanel

2U Wiremanager

24p PatchPanel

2U Fiber WAN FTP

2U Wiremanager

2U Wiremanager

Rack #1 (45U) Rack #2 (45U)

48p Switch

2U Wiremanager

48p PatchPanel

48p PatchPanel

2U Wiremanager

2U Wiremanager

48p Switch

2U Wiremanager

48p PatchPanel

2U Wiremanager

24p Core/Dis tribution Switch

2U Wiremanager

24p PatchPanel

2U Wiremanager

48p Switch

2U Wiremanager

2U Wiremanager

24p PatchPanel

2U Wiremanager

48p Switch

48p Switch

2U Wiremanager

Page 134 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 1 of 40

Technology Specification Guidelines

Boulder Valley School District

January 2017

3/7/16 – changed Data Jacks from Orange to Blue to differentiate Cat6A vs old Cat5e (orange jacks) 3/11/16 – changed CPI vertical wire manager from bad part number to correct part number of 11729-703 3/16/16 – minor tweaks/clarifications with feedback from Butler Engineering and Technology Group, Inc.

4/25/16 – added cat5e cable exception and spec for Beacon IP based Intercom system, cable color Green 5/24/16 – CHANGED CABLE COLORS: Intercom is now GRAY (Cat5e), Security is WHITE with Green stripe (Cat6) & HVAC control wire is Orange

8/3/16 – Part number change for Commscope 5e panel, added Labeling change for Intercom & WAP’s (adding lower case i and w in front of room numbers) & patch cable clarification 10/7/16 – Modified patch cable install terminology. Added section for Patch Cable Colors and “c” designation for Camera’s on patch panels

1/25/17 – Modified Cable Color for Security, it is now GREEN (Cat6) from patch panel to locations and Green Jacks

Division 27 – Communications Division 28 - Electronic Security

Page 135 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 2 of 40

Table of Contents

1.0 Background and Overview ............................................................... 03

2.0 Division 01 Issues Associated with Technology ......................... 04

3.0 Division 27 Communications

Section 27 00 00 - Operation of Communication Systems .................. 05

Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling .................................................. 21

Section 27 41 16.51 - Integrated AV Systems for Classrooms ............. 25

Section 27 42 19 - IP Video Distribution ............................................... 28

Section 27 51 13 - Paging System ....................................................... 28

Section 27 51 16 - Public Address System........................................... 30

Section 27 57 13 – Clock System ........................................................ 33

Section 27 57 19 – In Building Distribution System ............................. 34

4.0 Division 28 Electronic Life Safety and Security

Section 28 01 Operation of Integrated Security ...................................... 35

Section 28 10 00 Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection...... 39

Section 28 20 00 IP Video Surveillance System (IVSS) ......................... 40

Page 136 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 3 of 40

TECHNOLOGY SPECIFICATION GUIDELINES

1.0 Background

Boulder Valley School District has undertaken a planning effort which crosses the areas

of responsibility between the Curriculum and Instruction Division (including Instructional

Technologies Department), Facilities Design and Construction Division (including

Maintenance and Operations Department), and the Technology Services Divisions

addressing the instructional and administrative technology needs of the system.

All architects and engineers engaged in generating project documents for BVSD should

become familiar with this document. Once a data contractor is hired and starts working

on a site’s wiring all room numbering or renumbering shall be completed within a few

days of data contractors initial pulling of cables for labeling purposes. If room numbers

change during or after labeling is complete the project will pay whatever extra, it costs

for the data cabling company to completely re-label all cabling to match new room

numbers.

2.0 Overview of Specification Guidelines

The following Technology Specification Guidelines will follow the Construction

Specification Institute (CSI) Masterformat, 2004 Edition of the Titles, Divisions, and

Sections of a construction project scope of work. With regards to most of the technology

systems addressed by this guideline, they are part of the Division 27 Communications or

Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security.

It is also expected that the project team includes ANSI standards and commissioning

processes for all of these systems into the Division 01 portion of project documents

associated with technology. Any questions will be directed towards BVSD IT Personnel.

BVSD IT Personnel can be reached at our

SERVICE DESK (720) 561-HELP (4357)

Page 137 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 4 of 40

DIVISION 01

Part 04 41 00.01 Regulatory Requirements for Divisions 27 and 28

Conform to all federal, state, and local ordinances and building official requirements

Conform to all state and local building codes including NFPA 70, National Electrical Code

All material and equipment will be listed, labeled, or certified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,

where such standards have been established

All actively powered components will be approved for direct connection to the utility services

under Part 68 of FCC rules and regulations.

Part 01 42 00.01 Reference for Divisions 27 and 28

A. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Divisions 27 and 28

AES – Audio Engineering Society

BICSI – Building Industry Consulting Service International

ITSIM – Information Transport Systems Installation Manual

NAB – National Association of Broadcasters

TDMM – Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual

B. Reference Standards for Divisions 27 and 28

Grounding and Bonding for electronic systems will confirm to ANSI/TIA 607standard and all

addenda

All Division 27 cabling will conform to ANSI/TIA568B.1, ANSI/TIA569 standards and

addenda

All audio, video, and associated control systems will confirm to the following reference

standards

o AES – Handbook for Sound Engineers

o Sound System Engineering – Davis – 4th Edition

o NAB Engineering Handbook

C. Certification Standards for site personnel

At least one person involved in the daily installation of each system will hold certification for

BICSI ITS Technician for cabling and infocomm CTS-I for audio and video systems.

Part 01 77 11.01 Closeout Procedures for Divisions 27 and 28

A. Preliminary Closeout (Verification Report)

To reach substantial completion status, the systems contractor will confirm space by space

the proper operation of every portion of each system and submit their findings in a report.

The report will include the specific function tested, the date it was tested, and space for the

technician performing the test to write their initials

B. Final Closeout Review (Acceptance Testing)

Acceptance testing will be facilitated and performed by the contractor in the presence of the

Owner and Systems Designer. Testing reports shall be turned in to the District as soon as

possible. All tests shall pass standard cable/fiber standards meeting or exceeding

Manufacturers requirements.

Contractor will replicate and confirm 10% of each Verification Report

Contractor will provide all testing equipment and manpower as required. Cost is to be

included in the initial bid.

Page 138 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 5 of 40

DIVISION 27 00 00 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 01 11 Operation and Maintenance of Communications Systems

27 02 10 Operation of Structured Cabling and Enclosures

A. OVERVIEW

Design a copper and fiber optic cable based TIA/EIA 568-B.1 compliant wiring

infrastructure providing fiber optic connection to data closets and UTP CAT 6A cables to

local ports.

B. WORK INCLUDED

Plenum rated Fiber Optic cable

Cable trays are preferred but “J” hooks (or Commscope approved hangers) are

acceptable with IT approval. They shall be installed throughout all hallways/main spaces.

Approved hooks/hangers shall also be used in classroom and other spaces that Cable

Trays won’t fit. This will be coordinated with MEP during all phases of construction.

Plenum rated CAT 6A cable, for all sites

Fiber Interconnect Centers and CAT 6A patch panels

Racks, horizontal and vertical cable management, and extend grounded 20A AC power

to racks. Also grounding bus bars properly grounded shall also be installed in all closets.

Racks and cable trays shall also be grounded per BICSI standards.

Include one extra rack per MDF & IDF for security, paging, intercom, etc.

Telephone punch blocks

Connectors and wall plates

Cover plates and connector housings for all communication systems outlets located in

wall or the surface mounted raceway systems.

J hooks for areas beyond the cable tray installed through another scope of work required

to support the cable as specified herein.

Refer to section 27 06 10 for designation of quantity and locations of all cables

Card access installed on doors tied into District system (coordinate with BVSD Security

Personnel)

If building backup Generator is installed all power fed to MDF & IDF’s shall connected to

the Generator. If Generator is not installed, over the next several years one will be

installed at all buildings, please make best effort when installing new power to make it as

simple as possible to migrate in the future to be able to reroute to ATS.

MDF & IDF’s wrapped with fire resistant plywood, from 0’ AFF to 8’ AFF and NOT

painted.

MDF & IDF’s are to have concrete or tiled floors, concrete is preferred.

C. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

In the MDF (Main Distribution Frame) or TER (Telecommunications Equipment Room)

○ Primary and secondary Racks (quantity determined by Designer to meet the project

requirements). All cables installed shall be Plenum Rated.

Page 139 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 6 of 40

○ Fiber optic cable termination of District WAN fiber (coordinate with BVSD IT

Personnel for location on/near property) within its own FTP (Fiber Termination Point)

with SC connectors.

○ Fiber optic rack mounted interconnect center (FIC), CAT 6A patch panels and wire

management for termination of CAT 6A and fiber optic cables. FIC’s shall be

terminated in LC in both MDF & IDF’s.

○ Ladder rack system from the perimeter of the room to the cabinets and to the

Demarcation backboard.

○ Extend AC power from the ceiling junction box to rack(s) – one 20A (single gang-2

outlets) dedicated circuit per above each rack mounted to the side of the ladder track.

Plus, at minimum one dedicated 20A single gang outlet per wall at standard height.

○ AC Unit(s) - The temperature of the room shall be kept between 70º F and 76º F.

The fan coil unit should be installed outside the closet. Relative humidity in the

telecommunications room shall be kept between 30% and 55%.

○ NO other wet utilities (ex. Water, glycol, drains, etc.) shall pass through the MDF or

IDF, except for building sprinkler system heads required to be in the space by law.

This room shall not be shared with or used for any function other than legitimate

telecommunication systems. Other systems such as Security, HVAC controls, etc

shall be coordinated with BVSD IT personnel prior to any install to determine their

location within the space. Each room shall be designed and located to minimize the

potential for water entry.

○ The minimum space size for both MDF’s & IDF’s is 10’x12’ for elementary schools,

12’x12’ for middle schools and 12’x15’ for high schools, in most of our existing

schools the available room will be smaller. Open ceiling structure required with

minimum height of 10’.

○ The MDF and IDF’s shall not have doorsills or center posts. The door shall be 7 feet

high by 3 feet wide, lockable, and open outward. Doors and frames shall be

designed and piped for door alarms, electric locksets and access control system

readers.

○ All walls of MDF and IDF’s shall be lined with rigidly installed wall-to-wall framing of

3/4-inch trade size AC grade plywood, 8 feet high and fire rated. Plywood shall not

be painted.

○ Floors will be exposed concrete or tile. There shall be NO carpeting installed in

either MDF or IDF’s.

○ NO interior or exterior windows in MDF or IDF’s.

○ A telecommunications grounding source shall be provided at the terminating space.

Grounding BUS bar shall be installed so all racks and cable trays must be grounded.

○ For both MDF and IDF’s, lighting intensity shall be at least 50 foot candles at 3 ft.

above the floor. Light fixtures shall be chain hung at least 6 inches above the cable

tray. There shall be lighting on the front and back sides of installed racks. Prefer

LED lights that are on a motion activated switch with manual override.

○ MDF in a new building or completely relocated closet (2) 4-inch pipes shall be run

from MDF outside to closest Telco location near property with pull strings. Based on

CenturyLinks requirements. Plus (2) 2-inch pipes, one for BVSD WAN and Comcast.

Coordinate all pipe installs with IT personnel for exact location on site.

Page 140 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 7 of 40

In IDFs (Intermediate Distribution Frames) or TC (Telecommunication Closets)

○ Enclosure for mounting of FIC

○ Adherence to minimum space requirements

○ IDF’s are created if horizontal data cable lengths exceed 290 feet from MDF

○ AC Unit(s) - The temperature of the room shall be kept between 64º F and 75º F.

The fan coil unit should be installed outside the closet. Relative humidity in the

telecommunications room shall be kept between 30% and 55%.

○ No other wet utilities shall pass through the MDF or IDF, except for building sprinkler

systems. This room shall not be shared with or used for any function other than

legitimate telecommunication systems. Other systems such as Security, HVAC

controls, etc. shall be coordinated with IT personnel prior to any install to determine

their location within the space. Each room shall be designed and located to minimize

the potential for water entry.

○ Allocate space for racks and wall-mounted enclosures containing:

Data patch panels for Wireless Access Points and IP Security Cameras

Remote paging system frames

Access Control remote nodes.

From Telco DeMarc to MDF Cabinets

○ Minimum 25 pair Plenum Rated Category 5e UTP cable plus 20% spare capacity

based on the number of dial tones provided to the facility, if less than 25 than 25 is

enough. DeMarc location termination is 110 block, extended to Rack terminated on

patch panel.

From MDF to IDFs

○ Multi-strand tight buffer multimode fiber cable (single mode if distance exceeds

manufacturer’s maximum distance for 10 GB) from the MDF to all IDF locations

(BVSD determines quantity of strands required). Minimum of 12 strands at

Elementary and Middle schools. Minimum 24 strands at K-8’s and High Schools.

Terminated with LC connectors.

○ 25 pair Plenum Rated Cat5e terminated on patch panels at each location

○ (6) 18/4 copper wiring for BVSD Security

From MDF and IDF Racks to:

○ CAT 6A UTP for Computer/VoIP Data ports (minimum 3 installed per location)

○ CAT 6A UTP to Wireless Access Points (minimum 2 installed per location)

○ CAT 6 UTP to IP Security Cameras (verify with BVSD Security Personnel)

○ CAT 6A UTP to IP Based TV Controller in classrooms (minimum 2 installed per

location)

○ CAT 6 UTP (unterminated) to access control doors (verify with BVSD Security

Personnel)

○ CAT 5e UTP for Intercom ONLY

○ 1 Pair AWG16 cable for power to exterior cameras (verify with BVSD Security

Personnel)

○ Labeling is: in MDF/IDF – room number, in classroom/location Closet/Patch Panel

Letter/Port (ex. BA12). For security, HVAC, Electrical, etc. continue location label

with closet and port and for closet use room or hall or best description of device

location. Also see Division 28 specs.

Page 141 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 8 of 40

○ Cabling for BVSD Security, please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design

Construction document from BVSD Maintenance and Operations.

Cabling Color Code (cables from Patch Panels to Location – NOT patch)

○ Phone/VoIP, Data & Wireless cables shall be BLUE cable jacket

○ Security Cables shall be GREEN cable jacket

○ Fire shall be RED cable jacket

○ Intercom shall be GRAY cable jacket

○ HVAC control communications cable shall be ORANGE

Patch Cable Color (Patch panel to Switches)

YELLOW - Data/Voice (Cat6A)

GRAY - Printers (Cat6A)

PURPLE - WAPS (Cat6A)

WHITE - Facilities (Cat6A)

RED - Fire System (Cat6A)

GREEN - Security (Cat6)

ORANGE - Intercom (Cat5e)

BLACK - IT Mgmt (Cat6A)

BLUE - Video (Cat6A)

27 01 40 Operation of Audio Video Communications

27 01 41.51 Operation of Integrated AV Systems and Equipment for Classrooms

** BVSD is working with our new Director of Innovation in conjunction with IT Personnel

as of Apr. 2016 are reviewing the following information for exact brands and details of

products to be used. An RFP is also being finalized to be released within the next month

or two. The following information is generic and can be used as an initial guide. **

A. OVERVIEW

The Integrated AV Systems and Equipment for Classrooms is the provision and

installation of audio, and OFE display units in addition to IP Video Distribution System

components. LED TV’s will be a minimum size of 65 inches for standard classrooms,

but can go smaller depending on room size (ex. Small conference rooms).

Provides instructor with:

○ Control of local LED TV power

○ Control of local LED TV inputs

○ Audio inputs volume level

○ Connection from local input panel to projector

Provides priority over-ride of IR microphone and local audio inputs when building wide

voice announcements are made.

Connects to the local area network and provide status and monitoring capacity for all of

the components listed under its control which enables remote diagnostics and global

programming control

B. WORK INCLUDED

Classroom enclosure, wall mounted connections for HDMI, VGA & 3.5mm audio

Page 142 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 9 of 40

IP Based system for Central Management which will monitor at least but not limited to,

TV/System on/off time for statistical use of system.

Integrated Classroom AV - TBD

Flat panel display mounts with adjustable height and viewing angle. Exact details are

still TBD.

Install, interface, and test flat panel display (TV model information will be provided)

Install, interface, and test Interactive Whiteboard if applicable

27 01 42.19 Operation of IP Video Distribution System

A. Overview

B. BVSD has replaced the on premise distribution system, it has moved to a cloud based

solution. No on site system is needed.

27 01 50 Operation of Distributed Communications and Monitoring

27 01 51.13 Operation of Paging Systems

** The following information is generic, for specific details on current systems please

contact BVSD Maintenance & Operations personnel at 720-561-5143 **

A. Overview

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 01 41.62 Operation of Integrated AV Systems and Equipment for Auditorium,

Cafetorium/Dining, Band/Orchestra and Dance

** As with 27 01 40 above, BVSD is working with our new Director of Innovation in

conjunction with IT Personnel as of Apr. 2016 are reviewing the following information. The

following information is generic and can be used as an initial guide. **

A. AUDITORIUM

OVERVIEW

○ An IP based control system will enable remote selection of modes of operation either

in real-time or based on a prescheduled basis. The system will place all sound

system into Non-Operator Mode with Paging at 4:30AM of every school day.

○ The Integrated AV Systems for the Auditorium provide support for multiple for

activities and functions occurring within the space. Utilizing the front panel controls

or remote control panel of the Digital Signal Processor; or the IP Control system; the

Sound System can be placed into FOUR distinct Modes of Operation:

Non-Operator with Paging Mode:

- Will utilize an automatic mixer as the input device connected to the

microphone inputs located at the front edge of the stage and two wireless

microphone receivers.

- When using those specific microphone inputs or wireless receivers, the

system can be used without a dedicated audio operator in the Control Room.

Page 143 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 10 of 40

- Through an input on the Digital Signal Processor, a line level feed from the

Building Wide Paging System will be mixed with the automatic mixer output

providing classroom bell tone changes and voice announcement through the

Main Speaker System. Please also include a ducking function

option/description.

- A split feed of the Paging system input will be processed to the Backstage

Paging Speaker.

- This will be the STANDARD MODE of operation for the system.

Non-Operator without Paging Mode

- For activities where the intrusion of classroom bell tone changes or voice

announcement would be inappropriate, the Building Wide Paging input to the

Digital Signal Processor will be muted.

Operator with Paging Mode

- The Digital Signal Processor will select the Main input from the sound

console as its signal for the Main Auditorium Speakers.

- Additionally, the Digital Signal Processor will turn on its Monitor #1 and

Monitor #2 inputs.

- Through an input on the Digital Signal Processor, a line level feed from the

Building Wide Paging System will be mixed with the automatic mixer output

providing classroom bell tone changes and voice announcement through the

Main Speaker System.

- A split feed of the Paging system input will be processed to the Backstage

Paging Speaker.

Operator without Paging Mode

- For activities where the intrusion of classroom bell tone changes or voice

announcement would be inappropriate, the Building Wide Paging input to the

Digital Signal Processor will be muted.

○ When in Operator mode, the automixer controlling Stage microphone inputs and

wireless receivers will appear as a single input on the console.

○ The Digital Effect processor is available at all times but only heard when the system

is in Operator Mode and the audio operator properly selects and routes audio to and

from that unit.

○ Audio/Video playback and recording decks installed with the console can only be

used in Operator Mode. Utilization of a mobile racks with playback sources or a

Direct Box will enable a user on stage to feed audio and video to the auditorium

system when in one of the Non-Operator mode.

○ It is intended that the system remains “Powered Up” at all times but provide a power

sequencer system for when power is lost and the system is powered back on.

WORK INCLUDED

○ Special Note: The designer will utilize an acoustical modeling and speaker mapping

program equal to EASE and provide the Owner with coverage maps indicating the

speaker coverage will be ±1.5dB throughout the seating area.

○ Provision and installation of IP Master Control Unit and remote IP device which

interfaces via RS-232C to the System processor.

Page 144 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 11 of 40

○ Provision and installation of various input and output panels located throughout the

facility

○ Provision and installation of cabling connecting those panels to a Control Room Rack

and or Amplifier Enclosure.

○ Provision and installation of various inputs sources including Audio/Video and Audio

players, Audio Recorder and wireless microphone transmitters

○ Provision and installation an automatic mixer unit and sound system console

○ Provision and installation of a Digital Signal Processor for speaker system

management.

○ Provision and installation of power amplifiers

○ Provision and installation of Main Auditorium Speakers and Subwoofers, Monitor

Speakers, and Backstage Paging Speaker

○ Provision and installation of a wireless performance intercom system

○ Provision and installation of a Hearing Assist System

○ Interface of the Building Wide Paging system into the Auditorium System

○ Subcontracting AV Consultant for System tuning

○ Loose Equipment

The contractor will be responsible for providing and installing where required

various microphones, stands, cables, and impedance matching conversion boxes

as required. The loose equipment will be comprised of:

- Wireless Microphone system with receivers permanently installed in the

system but various types of transmitters and microphones shared across all

systems

- Podium/Lectern microphone

- Various types of handheld and stand mounted microphones

- Various sizes and types of microphone stands

- Various lengths of microphone cables

- Various lengths of monitor speaker cables

- Impedance matching direct boxes

- UTP based Video Transmission system, unless there is a latency concern,

then propose other solution to BVSD IT personnel.

B. CAFETORIUM, DINING AND “HEART” SOUND SYSTEM

** BVSD is working with our new Director of Innovation in conjunction with IT Personnel

as of Apr. 2016 are reviewing the following information for exact brands and details of

products to be used. The following information is generic and can be used as an initial

guide. **

OVERVIEW

○ Provide an IP central control unit and remote control unit which interfaces to the

Cafetorium Sound Room

○ The Integrated AV Systems for the Cafetorium provide support for multiple for

activities and functions occurring within the space. To be installed in a Lockable

Cabinet. Utilizing the front panel controls or remote control panel of the Digital

Signal Processor; or the IP Control system; the Sound System can be placed into

FIVE distinct Modes of Operation:

Page 145 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 12 of 40

Dining Mode

- Enables using the speaker system covering the Dining Area as a zone of the

Building Paging system

Non-Operator with Paging Mode:

- Will utilize an automatic mixer as the input device connected to the

microphone inputs located at the front edge of the stage and two wireless

microphone receivers.

- When using those specific microphone inputs or wireless receivers, the

system can be used without a dedicated audio operator in the Control Room.

- Through an input on the Digital Signal Processor, a line level feed from the

Building Wide Paging System will be mixed with the automatic mixer output

providing classroom bell tone changes and voice announcement through the

Main Speaker System.

- A split feed of the Paging system input will be processed to the Backstage

Paging Speaker.

Non-Operator without Paging Mode

- For activities where the intrusion of classroom bell tone changes or voice

announcement would be inappropriate, the Building Wide Paging input to the

Digital Signal Processor will be muted.

Operator with Paging Mode

- The Digital Signal Processor will select the Main input from the sound

console as its signal for the Main Auditorium Speakers.

- Additionally, the Digital Signal Processor will turn on its Monitor #1 input.

- Through an input on the Digital Signal Processor, a line level feed from the

Building Wide Paging System will be mixed with the automatic mixer output

providing classroom bell tone changes and voice announcement through the

Main Speaker System.

- A split feed of the Paging system input will be processed to the Backstage

Paging Speaker.

Operator without Paging Mode

- For activities where the intrusion of classroom bell tone changes or voice

announcement would be inappropriate, the Building Wide Paging input to the

Digital Signal Processor will be muted.

○ When in Operator mode, the automixer controlling Stage microphone inputs and

wireless receivers will appear as a single input on the console.

○ The Digital Effect processor is available at all times but only heard when the system

is in Operator Mode and the audio operator properly selects and routes audio to and

from that unit.

○ Audio/Video playback and recording decks installed with the console can only be

used in Operator Mode. Utilization of a mobile racks with playback sources or a

Direct Box will enable a user on stage to feed audio and video to the auditorium

system when in one of the Non-Operator mode.

○ It is intended that the system remains “Powered Up” at all times but provide a power

sequencer system for when power is lost and the system is powered back on.

Page 146 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 13 of 40

WORK INCLUDED

○ Provision and installation of various input and output panels located throughout the

facility

○ Provision and installation of cabling connecting those panels to a Control Room Rack

and or Amplifier Enclosure.

○ Provision and installation of various inputs sources including Audio/Video and Audio

players, Audio Recorder and wireless microphone transmitters

○ Provision and installation of an automatic mixer unit and sound system console

○ Provision and installation of a Digital Signal Processor for speaker system

management.

○ Provision and installation of power amplifiers

○ Provision and installation of Main Auditorium Speakers and Subwoofers, Monitor

Speakers, and Backstage Paging Speaker

○ Provision and installation of a wired and wireless performance intercom system

○ Provision and installation of a Hearing Assist System

○ Provision and installation of a Video Scaler and interface to the Projector installed by

the Integrate AV for Classroom contractor

○ Interface of the Building Wide Paging system into the Auditorium System

○ System tuning

○ LOOSE EQUIPMENT

The contractor will be responsible for providing and installing where required

various microphones, stands, cables, and impedance matching conversion boxes

as required. The loose equipment will be comprised of:

- Wireless Microphone system with receivers permanently installed in the

system but various types of transmitters and microphones shared across all

systems

- Podium/Lectern microphone

- Various types of handheld and stand mounted microphones

- Various sizes and types of microphone stands

- Various lengths of microphone cables

- Various lengths of monitor speaker cables

- Impedance matching direct boxes

- UTP based Video Transmission system

C. MUSIC ROOM or MUSIC SUITE PLAYBACK SYSTEMS

OVERVIEW

○ All Fine Arts room and suites will have a standalone integrated AV system with a

priority override for the Building Paging System feed. The system will provide simple

audio follow video switching and control of all local devices

○ All connections to the system cabinet will occur through the Local Input Panel

creating an umbilical with black flexible sheath coming from a wall plate with 3”

grommet to the cabinet

Page 147 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 14 of 40

WORK INCLUDED

○ Cabinet with umbilical cord connecting the cabinet to AV panels on the wall

○ Electronics installed in cabinet will include

Digital Audio Mixer with processor and power amplifier

Rack mounted Blu-Ray player

Rack mounted CD/MP3 player/recorder

Digital Recorder unit on pull out shelf with two ceiling mounted PZM microphones

Digital Camcorder with telescoping pole strapped to cabinet

Owner Furnished Workstation with 19” LCD panel display, keyboard, mouse.

Place LCD, keyboard, and mouse on top of cabinet and connect to workstation

Install one IR Microphone system provide by the Integrated AV Systems for

Classrooms contractor

Integrated AV Systems for Classrooms contractor will install on Local Input Plate

on the side of the cabinet.

Integrated AV Systems for Classrooms contractor will install an IP Control

system with inputs sized to meet the requirements of this space

○ Subwoofer speaker size TBD by space size and acoustics of space, plus enclosure.

○ Two-way speakers size TBD by space size and acoustics of space, plus enclosure.

○ The input fed by the line level Building Wide Paging system will have Priority Over

Ride for the system.

○ The system is designed to be energized at all times and remain connected to its

associated inputs panels at all times.

27 01 41.63 Operation of Public Address Systems for Stadiums and Arenas

** The following information is generic, for specific details on current systems please

contact BVSD Maintenance & Operations personnel at 720-561-5143 **

A. GYMNASIUMS

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. STADIUMS

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 01 50 Operation of Distributed Communications and Monitoring

27 01 53.13 Operation of Clock System

** The following information is generic, for specific details on current systems please

contact BVSD Maintenance & Operations personnel at 720-561-5143 **

A. Overview

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 01 53.19 Operation of Internal Antennae System

Page 148 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 15 of 40

** BVSD IT Personnel as of Oct. 2015 are reviewing the following information for exact

brands and details of products to be used if a DAS (Distributed Antennae System) are

needed within a building. The following information is generic and can be used as an

initial guide. **

27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications

27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

A. System Wiring Grounding Procedure

The system wiring will conform to the ANSI/TIA/EIA 609 technical building ground

scheme and Audio Engineering Society – Engineers Handbook.

B. Metallic Conduit and Boxes Grounding Procedure

All metallic conduit, boxes, and enclosures shall be permanently and effectively

grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Metallic enclosures

containing active equipment shall be grounded with due regard for minimization of

electrical noise.

27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems

27 05 28.29 Hanger and Supports for Communications Systems

A. Non Cable Tray Installations (BVSD requires all cables to be in Cable Tray’s, any deviation

needs prior BVSD IT Personnel approval.)

All cable installations which are not supported by a cable tray or conduit system and

where educational technology system cables are allowed to be placed in the structure of

the building and must follow the TIA/EIA standard methodology as noted in TIA/EIA 569

- Part 4.6 Ceiling Pathways. Specifically, sections 4.6.1 General, 4.6.2 Design

Guidelines, and 4.6.5 Cable Support.

Inaccessible ceiling areas, such as lock-in ceiling tiles, drywall or plaster, will not be

used as distribution pathways.

Accessible ceiling areas must have adequate and suitable space available for the

distribution layout (minimum of three inches’ clear vertical space between ceiling tiles

and distribution wiring and pathway).

The design shall provide a suitable means and method for supporting cables and wires

from the headend room (and/or telecommunications closet) to the area being served.

The cable will not be laid directly on the ceiling tiles or rail.

This contractor will provide cable support through the use of open-top cable supports

located on 48-60 inch centers. Where large quantities of cables (50-75) are bunched

together in the ceiling at a congested area, the contractor will use multiple open-top

cable supports or a special support designed to carry the additional weight. Must adhere

to the ANSI/TIA standards for fill rates.

B. Wiring Harnesses

All wires and cables used in assembling custom panels and equipment racks shall be

formed into harnesses, tied with Velcro tie wraps and supported in accordance with

Page 149 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 16 of 40

accepted engineering practice.

Harnessed cables will be combed straight.

Each cable that breaks out from a harness for termination shall be provided with ample

service loop. Cable length shall not exceed maximum cable length of 330 feet so it will

pass Certification tests.

Harnessed cables shall be formed in either a vertical or horizontal relationship to

equipment, controls, components, or terminations.

C. Speaker Supports

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

D. DISPLAY SUPPORTS

All display ceiling or wall supports will be capable of supporting three times the weight of

the display.

27 05 28.33 Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems

A. All pathways and conduit required for the project is provided through the Electrical

Contractor scope of work.

The Division 27 and 28 Contractors shall be responsible for reviewing the completed

conduit and raceway installation for all technology System as provided by the project's

electrical contractor.

If the completed installation does not conform to the following sections AND the

contractor believes such conditions may cause system problems, notify the Owner’s

Agent of those deviations.

27 05 28.34 Cabling

A. Installation of all audio, video, control, and/or fiber cable to be provided under this scope of

work is by this contractor.

Supervision to include, but not be limited to ensuring proper:

○ Pulling Tensions

○ Quantities

○ Types

○ Lengths

○ Routing

○ Wire Group Separation

○ Identification

Do not pull wire or cable through any box fitting or enclosure where change of raceway

alignment or direction occurs; do not bend conductors to less than recommended radius.

27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems

A. Identification and Nomenclature

Page 150 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 17 of 40

Switches, connectors, jacks, receptacles, outlets, cables and cable terminations shall be

logically and permanently marked in a manner approved by the Owner see details for

labeling below.

Custom panel nomenclature shall be engraved, etched, or screened.

Submit a sample layout for Architect and owner approval.

All terminal blocks and rack mounted equipment, and active slots of card frame systems

shall be clearly and logically labeled in a manner acceptable to the owner as to their

function, circuit, or system as appropriate

All cable terminations shall be clearly and permanently labeled with appropriate cable

number within twelve to eighteen inches from each end of the cable.

B. Cable Identification Standard

Copper Outlets (Plates, cable and/or biscuit) – XAABB: (ex AA20, Closet A, Panel A,

port 20)

○ Where “X” =”MDF”, or “IDF” indicating where the cable is terminated at the other end.

(A for MDF, B for 1st IDF, C for 2nd IDF, etc...)

○ “AA” equals the telecom patch panel letter.

○ “BB” equals the unique outlet number. This number shall be consecutive for each

MDF, or IDF shall be numbered 01, 02, 03, etc...

○ Jack Numbers shall match exactly at both ends of all copper distribution cables.

Patch Panels – Label each jack at the IDF or MDF patch panels with a corresponding

outlet number. Numbering shall be from left to right and from top to bottom with

consecutive numbers. *Note: All labels shall be uniform in size using the same font size

on letters and numbers (block style) throughout. Which should be printed on patch

panels already from factory. And Panel Alphabet lettering if not preset from

manufacturer can be installed using P-Touch or similar device onsite.

○ Add a lower case “i” in front of the room numbers/location on the patch panels to

identify INTERCOM connections (ex i303 or iGym).

○ Add a lower case “w” in front of the room numbers/location on the patch panels to

identify WAP (Wireless Access Points) connections (ex w303 or wGym).

○ Also add a lower case “c” in front of the room numbers/location on the patch panels to

identify Security Camera’s.

Backbone Distribution Patch Panel – Label each backbone distribution patch panel as

follows:

○ At FDE – “Feeder Cable to X-RMAAA”:

Where X equals “MDF” or “DEMARC” as applicable.

AAA is the telecom closet/room number where the MDF or DEMARC is located.

○ At MDF or DEMARC – “Feeder Cable to MDF-RMAAA”.

Where AAA is the telecom closet/room number where the IDF is located.

Fiber Telecommunications Outlet and Hub Cabinet – label as follows:

○ Fiber Outlets – X-RMAAA-BB.

Where “X” equals “MDF,” or “IDF” indicating where the cable is terminated at the

other end.

AAA is the telecom closet/room number where the MDF, or IDF is located.

BB is the outlet number. This number shall be consecutive for each outlet. The

numbers shall be unique for each outlet throughout the entire campus. Label

Page 151 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 18 of 40

each fiber connector in the patch panels at the MDF, or IDF with consecutive

numbers reading left to right, top to bottom. The numbering system should start

at the MDF and work outward.

Labeling for the backbone distribution fiber cable – At the MDF label all fiber connectors

sequentially from left to right, top to bottom. These numbers shall match at all IDF’s. Tag

cables at all connections and identify distribution side at all FDE’s with “Feeder Cable to

MDF–RMAAA”.

○ Where AAA is the telecom closet/room number, where the MDF is located.

○ Identify feeder distribution at MDF with “Feeder Cable to X-RMAAA”.

○ Where X is the “IDF” as applicable.

○ AAA is the telecom closet/room number where the MDF is located.

27 06 00 Schedules for Communications

27 06 10 Matrices

A. The designer will generate a document titled “Room Matrix” which delineates the specific

quantity of system ports and components located in each space in the facility. The following

Room Matrix Definitions provides the legend for column designations.

ENVIRONMENTAL NAME – Represents room name used by the personnel located in

the facility or the room name used on the project floor plan to designate a space in the

facility.

PLAN RM#. – Plan Room Number - Indicates the room number for the space as

represented on the referenced project floor plan.

IP VID – IP Video – Indicates that a WEB Enabled Hardware Based Decoder is located

in the room and interfaced to the local projector or flat panel display.

VID PORT – Video Data Port – Designates a space where the structured cabling

contractor will provide a data port designated for IP Video streaming functions.

LOCAL INPUT – Designates a wall plate with audio and video interconnect cables and

connectors for interface to the local video display.

VIDEO PAGE – Indicates that a “Video Page” subsystem as specified is located in the

designated space.

X”, X”, X” LCD/PLS - Designates the type and size of flat panel display (LED, LCD or

Plasma) possibly provided by the Owner and installed by the Integrated AV contractor

with required display mount.

PNL SPK – Panel Speaker – Designates that the Owner will provide a set of speakers

for the flat panel display in the space and the Integrated AV Contractor will install and

interface those speakers.

PROJ – Projector - Designates a space where the Integrated AV contractor will install a

video projector as designated in the project documents and required mount.

SMARTBOARD – Interactive Whiteboard – Designates a space where the Integrated AV

contractor will install and interface an Owner Furnished Interactive Whiteboard to the

Input Panel. Smartboards are a site based decision.

CNTRL SYS – Control System – Designates a space where the Integrated AV contractor

will provide and install an IP control system with wall control panel, IR microphone

system, AV switch and amplifier, projector interface, and ceiling mounted speakers

Page 152 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 19 of 40

ANLG PORT – Analog Port - Provide and terminate a phone cable from the VoIP

Gateway/Processor to this location. Please note any special installation requirements in

the Telephone Communication System specification, (i.e. Sharing fax line with dial-up

modem line, other system dial-up units, etc….)

PH PORT – Phone Port – Designates a space where the Structured Cabling contractor

will install, terminate, and test a CAT-5e/6A cable to its respective MDF/IDF for use by a

VoIP handset.

WALL/DESK PH – Wall/Desk Phone - Provide a wall mounted or desk located VoIP

handset.

DATA PORT – This column represents the number of data ports within this space which

require the contractor to install, terminate, and test a CAT-5e/6A cable to its respective

MDF/IDF

WRLS PORT – Wireless Port - Designates the Structured Cabling contractor will install,

terminate, and test a CAT-5e/6A cable from above the ceiling space with a twenty-five

foot service loop to its respective MDF/IDF for potential use with wireless access point.

CAM PORT – Camera Port – Indicates the Structured Cabling contractor will install.

Terminate, and test a CAT-5e/6A cable from above the ceiling space with a twenty-five-

foot service loop to its respective MDF/IDF for use with an IP Camera.

DOOR PORT – Door Port – Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design

Construction document from BVSD Maintenance and Operations.

STACK SWITCH – Stackable Switch – Indicates the MDF or IDF from which the space

will be serviced OR designated the number of 24 Port Stackable switches required for

that MDF/IDF (Owner will furnish switches in multiples of 48 or chassis based switched

with more ports and Owner will do install).

27 06 20 Conceptual Diagrams

The Designer will provide and insert conceptual diagrams of all systems contained within this

Division of work.

27 08 00 Commissioning of Communications

27 08 00.10 General Overview of Commissioning Methodology

A. Every system and component as specified herein will be verified and tested for correct

installation and operational parameters.

Completion of the process as defined herein will place the project into “Substantial

Completion” status.

The contractor for each system contained herein shall provide the following.

○ Verification Test Report - See Division 01, Part 01 77 13.01

○ Acceptance Tests - See Division 01, Part 01 77 16.01

27 08 10 Commissioning for Structured Cabling and Enclosures

27 08 10.10 Test Documentation

Page 153 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 20 of 40

A. UTP copper cable tests

Upon substantial completion of the data network and interfacing of the owner supplied

equipment test all copper cables

○ Test every data port for the functional requirements as listed previously.

○ The contractor will generate a wire map test of each four (4) pair UTP data

○ The contractor will provide a Total Channel Test in accordance with proposed

TIA/EIA TSB-67 Transmission Performance Specification for the total channel.

B. Fiber Distribution System Verification Tests

Factory Test – on reel OTDR test

Termination Test - EIA/TIA-526-14 Method B: Optical Power Loss Measurement of

Installed Multimode Fiber Optic Plant.

27 08 40 Commissioning for Audio-Video Communications

A. Provide the following audio commissioning tests

Prior to tests all equipment and components installed as specified herein.

EIA Tests – see standard

Low level speaker tests confirming proper operation of each speaker or components

High level speaker test confirming no buzzes or rattles

Using a RMS AC voltmeter with dB scale and tone generator adjust each active device

to have unity gain from the mixer output to the input of each amplifier.

Adjust the gain of each amplifier to provide a consistent and appropriate volume level

throughout the facility.

B. Provide the following video commissioning tests

Utilizing a laptop and a file generated Video Test Generator “DisplayMate for Windows –

Video Edition” from DisplayMate Technologies, Corporation; the contractor will run the

DisplayMate “Set Up Display” test patterns on every display located in the facility using

the display output resolution of a typical workstation used by the Owner.

The contractor will confirm proper operational parameters of the displays and adjust

black levels, brightness/contrast, and color if necessary to maximize quality of the

display.

The contractor will also test the HDMI, SVGA, 3.5mm audio, S-Video. and component

input (depending on what’s installed per location) on the Local Input Panel using

DisplayMate files. Provide conversion devices as necessary.

C. Test Equipment

Furnish the same testing equipment used for verification test during final test verification

by the Contractor and Owner’s representative.

27 08 50 Commissioning for distributed Communications and Monitoring

Execute Tests 27 08 40.10, 27 08 40.20 and 27 08 40.30 as above

END OF SECTION

Page 154 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 21 of 40

SECTION 27 10 00 – STRUCTURED CABLING

27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings

27 11 16 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES and ENCLOSURES

A. Racks (CPI part # 55053-703)

Floor-Mount Equipment Rack, from front of rack to back wall there shall be no less than

four feet clearance.

Standard 19" rack mounting space

84" high with 44 rack spaces (1 rack space = 1-3/4")

EIA-310-D standard 5/8" 5/8" 1/2" hole pattern

EIA channel width of 3" with double-sided 12/24 tapped screw holes

Lightweight high strength aluminum construction with black finish

15" deep base with four (4) 3/4" bolt down holes and equipped with hardware for

permanent mounting on concrete floor

First rack against/closest to the wall with vertical wire manager installed between it and

the wall.

All racks will be properly grounded, including ladder(s) and a grounding bar down the

side for LAN/WAN equipment.

Coordinate orientation of racks with BVSD IT Personnel

B. Vertical Rack Cable Management (CPI part # 11729-703)

84" high and minimum 6" deep

Lightweight high strength aluminum construction with black finish

Specify 6" wide "wide vertical" required

Units will be double sided.

C. Horizontal Rack Cable Management (Siemon part #WM-145-5)

Patch cord organizer for standard 19" rack with horizontal pathways for routing cables

and cords between adjacent racks and for single racks.

D. Enclosures (if needed, with BVSD IT Personnel approval ONLY. BVSD does not use them

anymore. We use Racks in closets)

Page 155 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 22 of 40

27 11 19 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS and PATCH PANELS

A. Fiber Termination Panel (FTP’s) or Fiber Interconnect Centers (FIC’s)

FTP’s

○ Terminate all strands of the fiber optic cable to the Rack mounted Interconnect Center

(RIC) in the MDF and IDF locations. Size the component to accommodate the fiber

runs terminated at each location.

○ Rack mountable interconnect center (RIC) capable of accepting 6 capacity passive LC

coupler connector panel modules for LAN, SC Connectors for WAN. LAN and WAN

fibers are in separate FIC’s. Both ends of termination are clearly labeled and tested.

B. Data Patch Panels (BVSD IT Personnel will approve layout prior to panel installation)

Terminate all Category 6A/6/5e cabling in the on TIA/EIA Category 6A/6/5e Commscope

compliant rack mounted patch panels located in the enclosure of a minimum 2 RU (3.5”)

height for 48 port panels. (ex. Uniprise 760162818 | UNP-U-10G-2U-48 {6A} & Uniprise UNP-U-510-2U-48 {5e})

With each patch panel and associated switch locations, provide a 2RU wire

management panel with dimensions sufficient for wiring management and mounted on a

standard EIA 19" compatible mounting panel. IT personnel will assist with layout.

BVSD will provide all patch cables but Intercom: 5e are from purchased from CxTec. Cat6

& Cat6A shall be COMMSCOPE branded cables ONLY. Colors/install of patch will be done by IT

personnel, with the exception of Intercom.

27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling

A. Communications Backbone Cabling

Multipair CAT 5e Cable

○ Provide a fully TIA/EIA 568-B Category 5e compliant, 24awg plenum rated cable in

unshielded twisted pair format from the DeMarc to the MDF cabinet for Dial Tone

acquisition by the VoIP System Call Manager.

Quantity of pairs required determined by designer

Communications Optical Fiber Multimode Fiber Cable

○ Multimode Fiber Cable

Laser Optimized IEEE 802.3z compliant general-purpose tight buffer multi-mode

cable with glass size of 50/125 microns conforming to TIA/EIA Horizontal

Distribution fiber requirements. Commscope LazrSPEED 550 (OM4) shall be

used. Cable shall be tested and meet Manufacturer’s requirements.

MDF to FDE/IDF cables will use a maximum 12 strand fiber cable (760128017 |

P-012-DZ-5K-FSUAQ) for Elementary and Middle, K-8’s and High’s get min of 24

strands (760125963 | P-024-DZ-5K-FMUAQ).

Fiber Terminations

○ LC - Field installable LC compatible high-precision glass-in-ceramic ferrule

accommodating all 50/125-micron multi-mode fibers.

○ Installation methods utilize quick drying UV epoxy, Hotmelt, or anaerobic method,

mechanical crimp.

Page 156 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 23 of 40

Uniprise 1U Fiber shelf 760147439 | RFE-SLC-IS-EMT-BK/1U-PNL plus appropriate

Adapter Panels for LC connections (760028209 | PNL-BK-024-MFA-LC02-AQ-

SHUTTERED) and any other supplies required. If multiple 24 strand cables are being

installed, then use the larger 2U unit 760147447 | RFE-SLC-IS-EMT-BK/2U-PNL.

27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling

A. Data Communications Horizontal Wiring

Provide plenum rated TIA/EIA 568-B Category 6A compliant unshielded twisted pair

(UTP) four pair cable for locations as on the Room Matrix. Plenum rated Category 6

ONLY for use with Security and Plenum Category 5e ONLY for use with Intercom

system. Cat 6A cable shall be Commscope Uniprise Ultra 10 10G4 Plenum rated

cable (8765404/10 | 10G4 blue), Cat 6 cable ONLY for Security (4763404/10 | 7504

Green) & Cat 5e ONLY for Intercom (4197314/10 | 5504M Gray)

○ Do not exceed a total footage of two hundred ninety feet (290) for any single run.

○ Installed and tested CAT 6A cable will be utilized for:

Data, VoIP/Analog & Wireless Access Port’s (WAP)

IP Security Cameras

For locations requiring an analog termination (facsimile machines, elevator cabs, etc…)

this contractor will use the same TI/EIA 568-B Category 6A cable for termination from

that port back to the MDF/IDF provided the distance does not exceed 300 feet.

For doors, the contractor will provide an unterminated CAT6 cable from the door location

to the closet. ** Exact cable to be determined by BVSD Security Personnel.

For exterior IP security cameras, the contractor will provide a single pair 16awg cable for

heater and blower power. ** Exact cable to be determined by BVSD Security Personnel.

If IP based camera system, see above CAT6 cable specs.

For first floor spaces with glass windows, cable for connection to the individual

occupancy sensor of each space. Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design

Construction document from BVSD Maintenance and Operations.

Provide color coding for the various cables as follows:

○ Phone/VoIP, Data and Wireless access points will utilize a Blue cable jacket

(8765404/10 | 10G4)

○ Security Cat6 will utilize a Green jacket (Uniprise 4763404/10 | 7504)

○ Intercom Cat5e will utilize a Gray jacket (Uniprise 4197314/10 | 5504M)

27 15 10 AV Communications Horizontal Cabling

NOTE: All Audio-Visual, Intercom, Sound, and Security cables, though specified in this

section, are to be priced with their respective systems. They are not to be included in price

proposals for the Structured Cabling section of the Proposal Form.

27 15 10.10 Horizontal Cabling for Integrated AV for Classrooms

A. Locations with displays and do not contain an Integrated AV Control System

The contractor will utilize a TBD system by BVSD IT Personnel.

Page 157 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 24 of 40

27 15 10 20 Horizontal Cabling for Public Address and Paging Systems

** Exact details shall be provided by BVSD Maintenance & Operations personnel at

720-561-5143 **

A. Auditorium Sub Woofer and LF Units

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. Auditorium Monitor Speakers

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

C. Auditorium MF/HF and Cabinet Speaker and Under Balcony Cables

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

D. Constant Voltage Speaker Circuits (70V)

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

E. Line Level and Microphone Cables.

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

F. Wireless Microphone Antenna Cable

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

G. Exterior Camera Power Cable

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 15 43 Communications Faceplates and Connectors

A. Data Communications Wall Plate and Connectors

The Structured Cabling contractor will be responsible for providing all plates for

communication boxes whether they exist for interconnection to Voice or Data systems or

not. The faceplates and connectors shall be only Commscope Uniprise approved for the

10G4 Cat6A cable, Cat6 ONLY for Security or Cat 5e ONLY for the Intercom System.

This contractor will also be responsible for providing blank inserts for every

communication box in the facility when that box contains inactive ports.

This contractor is responsible to coordinate their provision and termination of Data Jacks

associated with the AV Integration for Classrooms housings located in Local Input Plates,

Display Connector Plates, and Interactive Whiteboard Plates & Electrical Outlets.

Do not provide more than four connector locations per 1 gang faceplate without BVSD IT

Approval.

DATA OUTLETS - Terminate each data outlet with one Commscope Cat 6A Uniprise

Jack, all jacks are BLUE color. Commscope Cat 5e Uniprise Intercom System ONLY, all

jacks are ORANGE color. Commscope Cat 6 Jacks will be GREEN for Security

Page 158 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 25 of 40

Systems ONLY Utilize the TIA/EIA T568B termination method. Provide blanks as

necessary to fill all unused positions of the outlets.

27 15 44 AV Communications Faceplates and Connectors

NOTE: All Audio-Visual, Intercom, Sound, and Security faceplates and connectors, though

specified in this section, are to be priced with their respective systems.

A. Classroom Faceplates with AV Connectors

Faceplates containing AV connectors and designated for installation in instructional or

administrative spaces will be provided by the Integrated AV contractor.

For Fine Arts suites the local input panel will be located on the side of the cabinet

located in those spaces.

For Fine Arts suites, provide a face plate with 3” grommet opening

At each location requiring a Local Input and a Projector indicated on the ROOM MATRIX,

provide one RJ-45 with Cat5e/CAT6A connecting to an RJ-45 located at the AV Plate

associated with an Interactive Whiteboard location whether the board is installed or not.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 41 16.51 INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS and EQUIPMENT for CLASSROOMS

** Currently BVSD DOES NOT have classroom AV System. An RFP for Classroom Audio

system will be finalized spring of 2016. The following information is industry standards for basis for

future implementation. Some items in Section 27 41 16.53 may be used such as Flat Panel Display

Mounts and Interactive Whiteboards. **

Section 27 41 16.52 Central Products

A. Enclosures

Enclosures containing system components must also utilize cabinets following these

requirements.

○ Four post, 30” deep and 22” wide unit and open sides with minimum 44 rack mount

space with adjustable front and back 10-24 threaded rackrails.

○ Provide surge protection, AC power strips, 200 CFM blowers at top of enclosure.

○ When used for data termination enclosure, provide vertical cable duct with steel

fingers on each side of enclosure or between two cabling enclosures. Offset the

front rail to enable the cable duct to be located in front of the face of switches and

patch panels.

○ Provide side panels for single or multiple ganged racks to create a large single unit.

Finished in a durable black textured powder coat

B. Monitoring Unit

Provide a rack mount LCD/keyboard/mouse unit and a 16 way KVM switching unit

Interconnect the KVM to all video content servers and storage, classroom control

workstation, and streaming cable TV encoders

C. CATV Distribution

Page 159 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 26 of 40

Interconnect the local cable TV feed to Real Time MPEG2 encoders, installed through

this contract, but provided through the IP Video Distribution scope of work.

D. Classroom Control Software

The contractor will provide and initialize software on an Owner designated server or

workstation which provides interface to and control of all Classroom Control Units via the

local area network.

○ Enables WEB Browser access and review of remote unit status

○ Enables global scheduling functions

E. Video All-Call Units

Video all-call subsystem provides the owner with the capacity of providing a video page

from designated locations throughout the facility.

○ The system encoder, upon receipt of control signal from a computer associated with

the remote video all-call system, will suspend all system activity (current functions

locations for each source will be stored), and implement the "video page.”

○ Upon completion of the "video page,” the system supervisor will return all sources to

their status prior to implementation of the "video page.” Initialization of the "video

page" function will be through a local computer using WEB browser access to the

encoder.

○ Components

Mobile cart with locking cabinet and electrical surge protection

Camcorder as Video Camera with telescoping tripod attached to the cart

15“ Color LCD Panel Monitor

Microphone with push to talk switch

Microphone Preamp unit.

Encoder (Provided by 27 53 19 contractor)

Cables as required to make the system a functioning unit.

F. Remote Video Unit

Portable "Remote Video Unit" for use anywhere on the data network. The unit will be

comprised of:

○ Real-time MPEG2 encoder and video camera on a mobile cart.

○ These items allow the school to "return" a signal from a remote location back to the

remainder of the school.

○ Components

Mobile cart

Line/Microphone Preamp unit with local inputs

15” LCD Panel

Encoder (Provided by 27 53 19 contractor)

Cables as required to make the system a functioning unit

Section 27 41 16.53 Remote Products

A. Classroom AV

Page 160 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 27 of 40

Local input panel and custom cable transport of SXGA, S-Video, Composite Video

connection to local projector and stereo audio input to local sound systems

Minimum four input mixer with DSP and power amplifier and four ceiling mounted

speakers with a 2 Channel IR Microphone system, (or separate IR unit) with teacher

microphone (type of microphone determined by Owner). Unit will also provide sensing of

building paging system which will mute all local audio inputs

Interconnect system to local display and paging speaker cable

All Music and Fine Arts suites will provide a standalone system as noted above with

capability for interconnecting and selecting eight sources

B. Web Enable Hardware Decoder (Decoder)

This contractor will install and interface the Decoder provided by the Division 27 42 19

Public Information System contractor

○ This contractor will install the unit on the projector mount shelf and provide AV

jumper cables and RS-232C cable for interfacing the unit with the projector and In-

Room Audio System where required.

○ This contractor will attach Velcro to the Decoder and the back side of a flat panel

display for mounting of the unit to the flat panel display. Additionally, the contractor

will provide AC jumper cables and RS-232C control cable for interfacing the unit with

the flat panel display and associated panel speakers or In-Room Audio system as

required.

C. RF Wireless Keyboard

The contractor will provide and install an RF Wireless Keyboard with Dual Mode Joystick

for each WEB Enabled Hardware Decoder (Decoder).

D. Classroom AV Speakers

This contractor will install four ceiling speakers connected to the mixer/amplifier with

18awg plenum rated speaker cable as specified in above.

○ Lay-in ceiling tile speaker assembly which includes a full range, three-inch driver with

conical, tuned port baffle providing ±2dB frequency response from 100Hz to 6KHz

and 130 degrees of coverage from 100Hz to 8KHz.

○ Provide unit as manufactured by Extron, Model SI 3 Series of speakers or equivalent

by other manufacturers.

E. Flat Panel Display Mount

Flat Panel Displays will utilize mounts which do not require blocking for walls constructed

with gypsum board facing over steel studs.

The mounts will be anchored to the steel stud framing utilized for the gypsum board

face.

All mounts will utilize the “Snaptoggle” toggle bolt from Toggler Anchor Systems

www.toggler.com . Contractor will find metal stud and drill a ½” hole through the gypsum

board and stud and install the Snaptoggle product in that hole.

○ For flat panel displays of 23” to 37”, provide the following:

Product as manufactured by Omnimount, Model CL-M or equivalent from other

Page 161 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 28 of 40

manufacturers.

○ For flat panel displays of 37” up to 60” provide the following:

Product as manufactured by Omnimount, Model UT3

F. Projector Mounts

○ BVSD No longer uses Projectors, so no mounts are required.

G. Smartboards/Interactive Whiteboard (OFE – Owner Furnished Equipment)

This is determined by each site, so check with each individual school.

This contractor will unpack and install the OFE interactive whiteboard and provide a USB

Type II (12Mbps) to CAT5 extender and interconnect the board to the Local Input Plate.

○ USB to CAT5 extender. The Sender unit will be plugged into a 3 foot CAT5e/6A

patch cable (color selected by Owner) plugged into the CAT5e/6A port located on the

Local Input Panel for USB use.

H. Projectors and Flat Panel Displays

This contractor will unpack and install OFE projectors and flat panel displays.

I. Video Testing Software

This contractor will provide one copy of the DisplayMate – DisplayMate for Windows

Video Edition to the Owner and train Owner representatives on the use of those test files

and how to adjust/calibrate the projector and flat displays involved in this scope of work.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 27 42 19 IP VIDEO DISTRIBUTION

** BVSD has moved to a cloud based solution. **

END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 51 13 PAGING SYSTEM

** BVSD Maintenance and Operations personnel will be defining the following section. Please

contact them at 720-561-5143 for more information. The following is for a rough guideline

and information only. **

27 1 13.10 Central Products

.

A. Paging Control System

1. Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from

BVSD Maintenance and Operations.

A. PROGRAMMING

Page 162 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 29 of 40

The contractor will meet with the Owner to obtain operational parameters and program

the system to meet those requirements with the Owner

B. PAGING AMPLIFIER

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

C. MICROPHONE

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

D. ENCLOSURES

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

E. UPS (UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY)

**As of Sept. 2015 BVSD IT we have selected Xtreme Power’s Conversions model P90

(http://www.xpcc.com/products/p90/) as our new product. Over the next year IT personnel

will be replacing all existing units. BVSD Maintenance and Operation’s may choose the

same device or a different one. Please check with BVSD Maintenance and Operation’s

personnel for their decision. **

27 51 13.20 Distribution devices

A. GENERAL

1. Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

A. INTERIOR SPEAKERS

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. EXTERIOR SPEAKERS

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

C. LOCAL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 53 19.40 Training

A. The designer will meet with District personnel to discuss and define the training

requirements associated with this system and generate specification reflecting those

findings.

27 53 19.50 Warranty

Page 163 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 30 of 40

A. The Contractor shall guarantee that the system components and labor required to meet the

scope of work defined in this specification for a period of Two Year

SECTION 27 51 16 Public Address Systems

** BVSD Maintenance and Operations personnel will be defining the following section.

Please contact them at 720-561-5143 for more information. **

27 51 16.10 Central Products

A. Auditorium Mixing Console

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. Roll Top Desk

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

C. Automixer

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

D. Manual Mixer

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

E. Digital System Processor

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

F. AV Controller

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

G. Effects Processor

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

H. Multi-Channel Power Amplifier

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

I. Digital AV Switch/Mixer/Amplifier

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

Page 164 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 31 of 40

J. Auditorium/Cafetorium Power Amplifier

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

K. Stadium and Auxiliary Gym Power Amplifier

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

L. Playback Sources and Recorders

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

M. HEARING ASSIST SYSTEM

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

N. ENCLOSURES

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

O. Performance Intercom (Auditorium and Cafetoriums)

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 51 16.20 SPEAKER ASSEMBLIES

A. Auditorium Main Speakers

1. Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

A. Subwoofer

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. Monitor Speakers

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

C. Speaker Support Grid

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

D. Ceiling Speaker Systems

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Page 165 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 32 of 40

Maintenance and Operations.

E. Competition Gymnasium and Cafetorium Speaker

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

F. MS Gym and Auxiliary Gym Loudspeaker

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

G. Stadium Loudspeaker

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 51 16.30 INPUT and OUTPUT PANELS

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

A. Front of House

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. Stage Area Panels

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

C. Gym Input Panel

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 51 16.40 LOOSE EQUIPMENT

A. WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEMS

1. Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

A. Podium Microphone

Podium Condenser Microphone

○ Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. Standard Microphones Shared Between Facilities (Designer determine quantity)

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

Page 166 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 33 of 40

C. Gym and Stadium Microphones

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

D. Ceiling Mounted Microphones (Fine Arts Suites)

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

E. Microphone Stands

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

F. Microphone Cables, Speaker Cables, and Direct Boxes

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

G. DIRECT BOX

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

H. UTP VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 51 16.50 Local Interface Requirements

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

END OF SECTION SECTION 27 53 13 CLOCK SYSTEM

** BVSD Maintenance and Operations personnel will be defining the following section. Please

contact them at 720-561-5143 for more information. The following is a rough guideline and

information only. **

27 53 13.10 Central Products

A. Wireless Master Clock

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 53 13.20 Remote Products

A. Wireless Digital Wall Clocks

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Page 167 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 34 of 40

Maintenance and Operations.

A. Analog Wireless Wall Clocks

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 53 19 IN BUILDING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ** BVSD Security & Maintenance and Operations personnel will be defining the

following section. Please contact them at 720-561-5143 for more information. The

following is a rough guideline and information only. **

27 53 19.10 Overview

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 53 20.20 Central Products

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

27 53 20.30 Distribution Products

A. Coaxial Distribution Cable

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations. We do not install Coax for TV’s any more.

B. Radiation Components will provide radiation and reception of radio signals within the

envelope of the facility.

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

Page 168 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 35 of 40

DIVISION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

** BVSD Security personnel will be defining the following section. Please contact

them at 720-561-5930 for more information. The following is a rough guideline and

information only. **

Section 28 01 00 Operation and Maintenance of Security

Part 28 01 10 Operation of Integrated Security System

A. Overview

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. Work Included

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

C. Functional Requirements - The system functions and programming will be capable of

meeting the following operational modes and functional requirements on a pre-defined

schedule or ad hoc basis:

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

Part 28 01 30 Operation of Door Access Control System (DACS)

A. The DACS consists of a rack mounted facility control unit as follows:

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. The facility control unit will also act as the Graphic Display/Alarm Annunciation System with

the following capabilities which the contractor will program, import, and setup to meet the

Owner requirements.

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

C. Door Control and Monitoring

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

D. This contractor will coordinate with the Division 28 10 00 Structured Cabling contractor

regarding the door control UTP cable termination points within the actual facility.

Page 169 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 36 of 40

Part 28 01 05 Operation of IP Video Surveillance System (IVSS)

A. The IVSS consists of centrally located server(s) connected via the building LAN to IP

cameras located throughout the interior and exterior of the facility. The system software

provides for the following:

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. The IVSS will interface to the DACS and provide the following

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

C. The IVSS will provide the User with the following:

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

D. The IVSS will interface with various type of indoor and IP Video cameras providing the

functions as described above.

E. This contractor will coordinate with the Division 28 10 00 Structured Cabling contractor

regarding the IP Video Camera UTP cable termination points within the actual facility.

Section 28 05 00 Common Work Results for Security

Part 28 05 13 Conductors and Cables

A. All miscellaneous cables and jumpers interconnecting components of the DACS and IVSS

are part of the scope of work of the respective contractors including interface boards and

power supplies.

Part 28 05 14 IP Configuration

A. The DACS and IVSS contractor are responsible for securing IP addresses from the Owner

and programming their system components for network communication.

B. The IVSS contractor has responsibility for the discovery and documentation of all IP

components associated with their system which includes camera documentation of:

Serial number of device

MAC address of device

IP address used by the component and any additional pertinent IP information

Patch Panel port the components cable is terminated on

Switch port location the component is connected to

Page 170 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 37 of 40

Part 28 05 53 Identification of Security Systems

A. Provide the following identification

All labels will match the project drawings regarding unit designations or end of project

drawings will record the component label

Rack mounted units will utilize an engraved plastic laminate or metalized polyester

permanent label

Miscellaneous components (interface boards. power supplies, terminal blocks, etc…) will

utilize an engraved plastic laminate or metalized polyester permanent label

Cameras will utilize a metalized polyester permanent label with the camera label

Section 28 06 00 Schedules for Life Safety and Security

Part 28 06 10 Matrices

A. The designer will create and insert a Door Matrix spreadsheet which delineates the following

minimum parameters of doors connected to the DACS:

Door Number indicated on the architectural drawings

Location of the door based on the architectural drawings

Indicate the type of door hardware requiring interface:

○ Integrated Lockset with electric solenoid in door

○ RF Proximity Reader on integrated lockset

○ PIN keypad on integrated lockset

○ Individual RF proximity reader

○ Presence of ADA actuator

○ Electric strike

○ Hinge based Door Position Switch

○ Jamb based Door Position Switch

MDF or IDF where the local door control/monitoring cable provided by the Division. 27

10 00 Structured Cabling contractor will end

B. The designer will create and insert a Camera Matrix spreadsheet which delineates the

following minimum parameters of the IP Video Cameras connected to the IVSS

Camera designation as created by the designer

Location of where that camera is located on the architectural drawings

Indication of the following camera parameters

○ Indoor location

○ Exterior location

○ Fixed position camera

○ Mega-Pixel camera with 140˚ horizontal by 110 ˚ vertical degrees of coverage

○ Camera with motorized PTZ capacity

○ Ceiling mount

○ Wall mount

○ Corner mount

Page 171 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 38 of 40

○ Pole mount

MDF or IDF where the local door control/monitoring cable provided by the Division. 27

10 00 Structured Cabling contractor will end

Part 28 06 20 Conceptual Diagrams

A. The designer will create and insert a conceptual diagram of the integrated security system

as noted herein.

Section 28 07 00 Programming of Electronic Life Safety and Security

A. The DACS and IVSS will be responsible for the initial setup and programming of their

systems which will include the following activities:

Both contractors will coordinate a meeting with the Local Representatives for:

○ Review of Operation Modes as defined in Part 28 01 10.C

○ Obtain Owner defined parameters

○ Create meeting notes of the meetings

Program their respective systems accordingly

Provide programming revisions based on user feedback at the end of the first thirty days

of beneficial use of the systems.

Provide three copies of the system configuration files, including graphic maps and

interaction functions at that time.

After 6 months and no later than 12 months of first beneficial use, the contractors will

conduct an assessment meeting, including meeting minutes, with the Local

representatives to define operational changes required by the users. Cost to be

included in original contact.

The contractors will provide a final programming of the system based on that meeting

and include 3 copies of the any revised system files. Cost to be included in original

contact.

Section 28 08 00 Commissioning of Electronic Life Safety and Security

A. Verification Test reports

The DACS and IVSS contractors will have individual technicians test and document the

testing of all components in their systems

The DACS contractor will test every door, controlled or monitored, for proper system

operation for:

○ Integrated lockset operation including RF Proximity reader, PIN keypad or remote

control

○ ADA doors with independent RF Proximity reader, ADA actuators, electric strike, and

DPS

○ All doors with independent DPS are properly operating

The IVSS contractor will test every camera and confirm:

○ Dome or housing is clean, without smudges or fingerprints from installation

○ Camera is properly oriented to their respective field of view

Page 172 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 39 of 40

○ Vari-focal lenses are properly focused for their respective field of view

○ Documentation for each camera as required in Part 28 05 14.B.

The DACS and IVSS contractors have confirmed that the systems enter into and provide

the functions as defined in Part 28 01 10.C

B. Acceptance Tests

The contractors will be prepared to verify all aspects of their system operation as

required in the Verification Test reports while the Consultant and Owner representatives

witness the tests

The acceptance test results will not vary from the verification test reports or the

contractor will be required to re-verify all systems a second time and reimburse the

consultant for the additional time required to conduct a second Proof of Performance

test.

DIVISION 28 10 00 Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection

A. Access Control Global Applications

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. Access Control Systems and Database Management

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

C. Access Control Systems Components

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

D. Door Hardware Interface Boards and Power Supplies

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

E. Access Control Interfaces

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

F. Training

The contractor will provide training for District level and local campus of User and

Programmer/Operator level personnel as follows:

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from

BVSD Maintenance and Operations.

G. Warranty

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

Page 173 of 174

Technology Specifications Guidelines

Updated: January 25, 2017 as, dh, tr, mh, lf & kb (engineer & technical advisor)

Boulder Valley School District Division of Information Technology Page 40 of 40

DIVISION 28 20 00 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (IVSS)

A. Global Applications of IVSS

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

B. The IVSS consists of rack mounted servers with software providing the following:

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

D. Remote Client

The Remote Client software will be capable of:

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

E. IVSS Infrastructure

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

F. IP Video Surveillance Remote Devices

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

G. Training

The contractor will provide training for District level and local campus of User and

Programmer/Operator level personnel as follows:

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from

BVSD Maintenance and Operations.

H. Warranty

Please refer to Technical Guide for Facility Design Construction document from BVSD

Maintenance and Operations.

Page 174 of 174